497 1 d11255d497.htm SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME Schwab Retirement Income

SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITYTM  PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2016

Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (“Pacific Life”) through Separate Account A of Pacific Life.

The Contracts are sold exclusively by financial consultants including independent contractors and their employees of Charles Schwab & Co., Inc. (“Schwab”) (“Schwab Financial Consultants”). In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. We, us and our refer to Pacific Life. Contract means a Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity contract, unless we state otherwise. Schwab is not affiliated with Pacific Life.

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. Please read the Prospectus carefully, and keep it for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract; the Variable Investment Options are listed according to the underlying Funds:

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Schwab Annuity Portfolios

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio

Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio

Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio

Schwab Government Money Market PortfolioTM*

(Formerly called Schwab Money Market Portfolio)

*The Schwab Government Money Market Portfolio is only available to California applicants Age 60 or older during the Right to Cancel “Free Look” period.

You will find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2016. The SAI has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. The contents of the SAI are described in this Prospectus after The General Account section – see the Table of Contents. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract. The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its SAI. A Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the SEC has not approved or disapproved of the securities or passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of the disclosure in this Prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

This material is not intended to be used, nor can it be used by any taxpayer, for the purpose of avoiding U.S. federal, state or local tax penalties. Pacific Life, its distributors and their respective representatives do not provide tax, accounting or legal advice. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.



YOUR GUIDE TO THIS PROSPECTUS

   

Terms Used in This Prospectus

4

Overview

6

Your Investment Options

13

Purchasing Your Contract

14

How to Apply for Your Contract

14

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

14

How Your Purchase Payments Are Allocated

15

Choosing Your Investment Options

15

Investing in Variable Investment Options

15

When Your Purchase Payment is Effective

16

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

16

Systematic Transfer Option

17

Charges, Fees and Deductions

17

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

17

Administrative Fee

18

Optional Rider Charges

18

Premium Taxes

19

Waivers and Reduced Charges

19

Fund Expenses

19

Annuitization

19

Selecting Your Annuitant

19

Annuitization

19

Choosing Your Annuity Date

20

Default Annuity Date and Options

20

Choosing Your Annuity Option

20

Your Annuity Payments

22

Death Benefits and Optional Death Benefit Riders

22

Death Benefits

22

Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit

24

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

25

Withdrawals

27

Optional Withdrawals

27

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

28

Right to Cancel ("Free Look")

28

Optional Living Benefit Riders

29

General Information

29

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

30

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

34

Pacific Life and the Separate Account

38

Federal Tax Issues

38

Taxation of Annuities - General Provisions

39

Non-Qualified Contracts - General Rules

39

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

42

Taxes on Pacific Life

42

Qualified Contracts - General Rules

42

IRAs and Qualified Plans

44

Additional Information

46

Voting Rights

46

Changes to Your Contract

46

Changes to All Contracts

47

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

48

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

48

Electronic Information Consent

49

Timing of Payments and Transactions

49

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

49

Cybersecurity

50

Distribution Arrangements

50

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

51

State Considerations

51

Financial Statements

51

The General Account

52

Contents of the Statement of Additional Information

53

Appendix A: Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) Sample Calculations

54

Appendix B: Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint) Sample Calculations

61

Appendix C: Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit and Stepped-Up Death Benefit Sample Calculations

68

Financial Highlights (Condensed Financial
Information) FH-1

Where To Go For More Information Back Cover

3


TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. You can reach Pacific Life directly at (800) 722-4448 or, if you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading, an applicable underlying Fund Portfolio is open for trading, and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. An underlying Fund Portfolio may be closed when other federal holidays are observed such as Columbus Day and Veterans Day. See the underlying Fund Portfolio prospectus. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant should die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Anniversaries, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Purchase Payments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fund – A registered open-end management investment company; collectively refers to Schwab Annuity Portfolios.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

In Proper Form – This is the standard we apply when we determine whether an instruction is satisfactory to us. An instruction (in writing or by other means that we accept (e.g. via telephone or electronic submission)) is considered to be in proper form if it is received at our Service Center in a manner that is satisfactory to us, such that is sufficiently complete and clear so that we do not have to exercise any discretion to follow the instruction, including any information and supporting legal documentation necessary to effect the transaction. Any forms that we provide will identify any necessary supporting documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in proper form, and we reserve the right to change or waive any in proper form requirements at any time.

4


Investment (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Investment Option – A Subaccount or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions may apply for Qualified Contracts.

Non-Natural Owner – A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 408, 408A or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account.)

5


OVERVIEW

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) for more detailed information.

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are allowed or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your Schwab Financial Consultant or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations. This prospectus provides a description of the material rights and obligations under the Contract. Your Contract (including any Riders and/or Endorsements) represents the contractual agreement between you and us. Any guarantees provided for under your Contract or through optional Riders are backed by Pacific Life’s financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Schwab is not responsible for any Contract guarantees.

Some of the Terms used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS section.

Contract Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you are looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your Schwab Financial Consultant whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and which underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

This Contract is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA). It is important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

This Contract is a variable annuity, which means that your Contract Value fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time, subject to certain limitations.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your Schwab Financial Consultant for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made and the length of the Free Look period may vary, depending on the state where you signed your application, the type of Contract you purchased, and whether the Contract replaced another annuity contract or life insurance policy. You will find a complete description of the Free Look period that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover sheet.

For more information about the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) period see WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”).

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect your Contract Value during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity Date.

6


The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Purchase Payments subject to certain limitations, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $50,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract or a Qualified Contract. Additional Purchase Payments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts on Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, but we reserve the right to enforce such minimums in the future.

For more information about Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”) see PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT – Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”).

Investment Options

Ask your Schwab Financial Consultant to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Schwab or the Schwab Financial Consultant you engage to provide advice and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. Pacific Life is not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations you make, recommendations such Schwab Financial Consultants make or any allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your behalf.

You can choose from a selection of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Fund Portfolio. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

We allocate your Purchase Payments to the Investment Options you choose. Your Contract Value will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you have chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

For more information about the Investment Options and the corresponding Investment Adviser see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS – Your Variable Investment Options.

Transferring Among Investment Options

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Transfers made under any systematic transfer program are excluded from these limitations.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement.

For more information about transfers and transfer limitations see HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. There is no withdrawal charge.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you are under age 59½, a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

For more information about withdrawals and withdrawal minimums see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals.

The Annuitization Phase

The annuitization phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.

These annuity payments will be fixed. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments. We will make the income payments to you or your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for any tax consequences of any annuity payments.

For more information about annuitization see ANNUITIZATION and for annuity options available under the Contract see ANNUITIZATION – Choosing Your Annuity OptionAnnuity Options.

The Death Benefit

Generally, the Contract provides a death payout upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions In Proper Form. To whom we pay a death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own. The Contract (without taking into account any optional death benefit riders) also provides a Death Benefit Amount (see the Death Benefit Amount subsection in DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS).

7


For more information about the death benefit see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS - Death Benefits.

Optional Riders

Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state availability) and may be discontinued for purchase at anytime without prior notice. Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with your Schwab Financial Consultant for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form. Any guarantees provided through optional riders are backed by the financial strength and claims-paying ability of Pacific Life. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Schwab is not responsible for any optional Rider guarantees.

If an optional death benefit rider is purchased, you may not purchase a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Rider (Single or Joint).

Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit

This optional Rider offers you the ability to have your Death Benefit Amount be the greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Notice Date. The Notice Date is the day on which we receive, In Proper Form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of any death benefit proceeds. There is a reset to the benefits provided under the Rider when certain owner changes are made (see the Owner Change subsection of the Rider for more information). You may not purchase this Rider after the Contract Date.

For more information about the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERSReturn of Purchase Payments Death Benefit.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the oldest Owner or Annuitant’s 81st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. There is a reset to the benefits provided under the Rider when certain owner changes are made (see the Owner Change subsection of the Rider for more information). You may not purchase this Rider after the Contract Date.

For more information about the Stepped-Up Death Benefit see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Stepped-Up Death Benefit.

Optional Living Benefit Riders

Living benefit riders available through this Contract, for an additional cost, are categorized as guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders. The following is a list (which may change from time to time) of riders currently available:

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit

· Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

· Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders focus on providing an income stream for life through withdrawals during the accumulation phase, if certain conditions are met. The riders have the same basic structure with differences in the percentage that may be withdrawn each year, how long the withdrawals may last (for example, for a single life or for joint lives), and what age lifetime withdrawals may begin, if applicable. The riders also offer the potential to lock in market gains on each Contract Anniversary which may increase the annual amount you may withdraw each year under the rider. The riders provide an income stream regardless of market performance, even if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Additional Information Applicable to Optional Living Benefit Riders

You may purchase an optional Rider at anytime (if available). Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

You can find more information about the costs associated with the optional riders within the next few pages and in the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges section. You can find complete information about each optional rider and its key features and benefits in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment Options we make available for these Riders. The allocation limitations associated with these Riders may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERSGeneral InformationInvestment Allocation Requirements. Failure to adhere to the Investment Allocation Requirements may cause your Rider to terminate. We reserve the right to add, remove or change asset allocation programs or Investment Options we make available for these Riders at any time. We may make such a change due

8


to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders (for example, changes in an underlying portfolio’s investment objective and principal investment strategies, or changes in general market conditions), or otherwise. Generally, a change to an existing allowable Investment Option will not require you to reallocate or transfer the total amount of Contract Value allocated to an affected Investment Option, except when an underlying portfolio is liquidated by a determination of its Board of Directors or by a fund substitution. If a change is required that will result in a reallocation or transfer of an existing Investment Option, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally 90 calendar days unless we are required to give less notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your rider will terminate.

Distributions made due to a request for partial annuitization, divorce instructions or under Code Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments) are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may adversely affect Rider benefits.

Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.

Schwab may limit you from purchasing some optional Riders based upon your age or other factors. You should work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to decide whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to review the different riders available for purchase, how they function, how the riders differ from one another, and to understand all of the terms and conditions of an optional rider prior to purchase.

9


Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning and surrendering your Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

There are no front-end sales charges or withdrawal charges. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may apply to your Contract. We generally charge state premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.

Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Variable Account Value1):

       
 

Without any
Death Benefit Rider

With Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit Rider Only

With Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider Only

·  Mortality and Expense Risk Charge2

0.35%

0.35%

0.35%

·  Administrative Fee2

0.25%

0.25%

0.25%

·  Death Benefit Rider Charge2, 3

N/A

0.20%

0.40%

·  Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses

0.60%

0.80%

1.00%

Optional Rider4 Annual Expenses:

     
 

Current Charge Percentage

Maximum Charge Percentage

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit

   

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)5 

0.80%

1.50%

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)5 

1.00%

1.75%

1 The Variable Account Value is the value of your Variable Investment Options on any Business Day.

2 This is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.

3 If you buy an optional death benefit rider, we will add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until, and including, your Annuity Date. Only one death benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.

4  Only one guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.

5 If you buy Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. On the Rider Effective Date, the Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or, if purchased after Contract issue, the Contract Value as of the Rider Effective Date. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint). The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. After the Rider Effective Date, we deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options every 3 month anniversary of your Contract Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon full annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.

10


Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

For more about the underlying Funds see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONSYour Variable Investment Options, and see each underlying Fund Prospectus.

This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses incurred by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses (including management fees, shareholder servicing and/or distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses) charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets. The amounts are based on expenses paid in the year ended December 31, 2015, adjusted to reflect anticipated changes in fees and expenses, or, for new Portfolios, are based on estimates for the current fiscal year.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Fund Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund Prospectus.

     
 

Minimum

Maximum

Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses before any waivers or expense reimbursements

0.66%

0.81%

Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements

0.66%

0.74%

To help limit Fund expenses, Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc. contractually agreed to reduce investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse certain Portfolios of their respective Funds which may reduce the Portfolio’s expenses. The range of expenses in the first row above does not include the effect of any waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangement. The range of expenses in the second row above includes the effect of Fund waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangements that are in effect. The waiver and/or reimbursement arrangements vary in length. There can be no assurance that Fund expense waivers or reimbursements will be extended beyond their current terms as outlined in each Fund prospectus, and they may not cover certain expenses such as extraordinary expenses. See each Fund prospectus for complete information regarding annual operating expenses and any waivers or reimbursements in effect for a particular Fund.

11


Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Contract Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the highest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2015. The maximum amounts also include the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination. The optional Rider included is Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint). The minimum amounts reflected below include the minimum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2015. The minimum amounts do not include any optional Riders.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Purchase Payment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:

· If you surrendered, annuitized, or left your money in your Contract:

         
 

1 Year

3 Years

5 Years

10 Years

Maximum

$319

$964

$1,620

$3,316

Minimum

$128

$400

$692

$1,523

In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on Contract fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS (Condensed Financial Information) appendix in this Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.

12


YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to help you choose the right Investment Options for your investment goals and risk tolerance.

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Fund Portfolio. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.

     

SCHWAB ANNUITY

PORTFOLIOS

INVESTMENT GOAL

MANAGER

Schwab VIT Balanced

Portfolio

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and income.

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

Schwab VIT Balanced

with Growth Portfolio

Seeks long-term capital appreciation and income.

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

Schwab VIT Growth

Portfolio

Seeks long-term capital appreciation.

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

Schwab Government Money Market Portfolio*

(formerly called Schwab Money Market Portfolio)

Seeks the highest current income consistent with stability of capital and liquidity.

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

*The Schwab Government Money Market Portfolio is only available to California applicants age 60 or older during the Right to Cancel “Free Look” period.

The Investment Adviser

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc. (“CSIM”) is the investment adviser for the Schwab Annuity Portfolios. CSIM is a subsidiary of the Charles Schwab Corporation and an affiliate of Schwab. CSIM manages the Schwab Funds®, Laudus Funds, and the Schwab ETFs including certain ETFs in which the Schwab Annuity Portfolios will invest.

13


PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, you must work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Purchase Payment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 2290, Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from Schwab and our administrative procedures with Schwab so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If your application and Purchase Payment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing annuity. Call your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. You can reach Pacific Life directly at (800) 722-4448 or, if you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Purchase Payment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal, state, and local tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint Owners/Annuitants and Contingent Annuitants, for which a Contract will be issued is 90. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled and a refund will be issued. Depending on the state where your application was signed, plan type, and whether the Contract was funded as a replacement, the refund amount may be more or less than the initial Purchase Payment received, or any other Purchase Payment we received in connection with an exchange or transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, In Proper Form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to probate.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Purchase Payment

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $50,000 for Non-Qualified or Qualified Contracts. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Purchase Payment is not included when you submit your application, you must establish a pre-authorized investment program. A pre-authorized investment program allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Purchase Payment in equal installments over the first Contract Year. Further requirements for the pre-authorized investment program are discussed in the Pre-Authorized Investment Request form.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Purchase Payment that will bring your aggregate Purchase Payments over $1,000,000.

Making Additional Purchase Payments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts in the future. Additional Purchase Payments will be allocated according to the instructions we have on file unless we receive specific allocation instructions.

Forms of Purchase Payment

Your initial and additional Purchase Payments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Purchase Payments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Purchase Payments are:

· personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,

· money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,

· third party payments when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

· wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Purchase Payments in the following forms:

·  cash,

·  credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,

14


· money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,

· starter checks,

· home equity checks,

·  eChecks,

·  cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,

· third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

· wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Purchase Payments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. Any unacceptable Purchase Payment inadvertently invested may be returned and the amount returned may be more or less than the amount submitted. If you make Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Purchase Payments among any of the available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial Purchase Payment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Purchase Payment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”). We reserve the right to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Purchase Payment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

Example: You allocate $600 to Subaccount A. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in Subaccount A is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600 ($600 / $15 = 40).

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Purchase Payments allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Purchase Payments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in Subaccount A will change to reflect the performance of the corresponding Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

where   (Y) = the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and

(Z) = the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

15


(A ÷ B) - C

where  (A) = the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a + b + c

(a) = the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;

(b) = the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and

(c) = any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments;

(B) = the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and

(C) = a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus the Administrative Fee and any applicable increase in the Risk Charge (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS).

The Subaccount Unit Value may increase or decrease from one valuation period to another. For Subaccount Unit Values please go to www.pacificlife.com.

When Your Purchase Payment is Effective

Your initial Purchase Payment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Purchase Payment is effective on the day we receive it In Proper Form. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONInquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests.

The day your Purchase Payment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Schwab VIT Growth Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. Transfers that occur as a result of the portfolio rebalancing program are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your Schwab Financial Consultant via telephone. If you (or your Schwab Financial Consultant) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your Schwab Financial Consultant) immediately.

Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form, unless you request a systematic transfer program with a future date.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value

16


in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

Market-timing Restrictions

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a Schwab Financial Consultant or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to Portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:

· not accepting transfer instructions from a Schwab Financial Consultant acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and

· not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Systematic Transfer Option

We offer one systematic transfer option: portfolio rebalancing. There is no charge for this option and transfers under this option are not counted towards your total transfers in a calendar year. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing portfolio rebalancing.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g. 30% in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in Subaccount C). Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date. Only Variable Investment Options are available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.35% of each Subaccount’s assets.

17


The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date (the charge will be assessed on the Annuity Date then discontinue thereafter).

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Increase in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider is Purchased

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit. The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 0.55% if the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date.

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.40% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit. The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 0.75% if the Stepped-Up Death Benefit is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date.

The Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit and the Stepped-Up Death Benefit cannot be owned or in effect at the same time.

See DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.25% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee. The Administrative Fee will stop at the Annuity Date (the charge will be assessed on the Annuity Date then discontinue thereafter).

Optional Rider Charges

If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis.

Following the Rider Effective Date, the charge is deducted every 3 month anniversary of your Contract Date (“Quarterly Contract Anniversary”). The Rider charge will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect and when the Rider terminates. The charge is deducted in arrears each Quarterly Contract Anniversary. If a Rider is purchased on a date other than a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, the Rider charge will be prorated the first time the charge is deducted.

If your Rider terminates on a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, the entire charge for the prior quarter will be deducted from the Contract Value on that anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, we will prorate the charge based on the Protected Payment Base as of the day the Rider terminates. Such prorated amount will be deducted from the Contract Value on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or on the Quarterly Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Rider terminates.

If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider annual charge percentage may change if a Reset occurs under the Rider provisions. However, the annual charge percentage will not exceed the maximum annual charge percentage (indicated in the table below) for the applicable Rider. You may elect to opt-out of a Reset and your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was before the Reset. If an Automatic Reset never occurs, the annual charge percentage established on the Rider Effective Date is guaranteed not to change. You can find more information about Protected Payment Base and Automatic Resets for each applicable rider in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section.

Annual Charge Percentage Table

         

Optional Rider

Current Annual Charge Percentage

Maximum Annual Charge Percentage Under the Rider

To determine the amount to be deducted, the Annual Charge Percentage is multiplied by the:

The Charge is

deducted on each:

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

0.80%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Contract Anniversary

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

1.00%

1.75%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Contract Anniversary

See Mortality and Expense Risk Charge for the Stepped-Up Death Benefit and Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit charge information.

18


Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Purchase Payments (“premium tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Premium tax is charged according to the rate determined by your state of residence at the time of annuitization. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Purchase Payments, we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof ) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase Payments we have received. We currently base this charge on your Contract Value, but we reserve the right to base this charge on the transaction amount, the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriately reimburses us for premium taxes paid on this Contract.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments. Any such charge deducted from the Contract Value will be deducted on a proportionate basis. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATEDInvesting in Variable Investment OptionsCalculating Subaccount Unit Values to see how such charges are deducted from the Separate Account. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges or credit additional amounts on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. Any additional amounts will be added to the Contract when we apply Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to terminate waiver, reduced charge and crediting programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

With respect to additional amounts as described above, in most states you may not receive any amount credited if you return your Contract during the Free Look period as described under WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”).

Fund Expenses

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees, any service and distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses incurred by the various Fund Portfolios, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.

Some Investment Options available to you are “fund of funds”. A fund of funds portfolio is a fund that invests in other funds in addition to other investments that the portfolio may make. Expenses of fund of funds Investment Options may be higher than non fund of funds Investment Options due to the two tiered level of expenses. See the Fund prospectuses for detailed portfolio expenses and other information before investing.

ANNUITIZATION

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit your Contract application, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. If you do not have Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not impact any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 91st birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization

Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization (income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all

19


of your Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and any optional Rider charge. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available for only certain types of Contracts. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax advisor for information on full or partial annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax advisor for more information if you are interested in this option.

Distributions made due to a request for partial annuitization are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may adversely affect optional Rider benefits. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to requesting partial annuitization.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, In Proper Form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Owner’s attained age 59½. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than the sole Annuitant’s 95th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday. Different requirements may apply as required by any applicable state law or the Code. We may, at our sole discretion, allow you to extend your Annuity Date. We reserve the right, at any time, to not offer any extension to your Annuity Date regardless of whether we may have granted any extensions to you or to any others in the past.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant not later than the Owner/Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his or her Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95th birthday, whichever applies. If you have a Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95th birthday. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) and the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into a fixed dollar annuity.

Additionally:

· If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain.

· If you have a Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a five year Period Certain or a shorter period certain as may be required by federal regulation. If you are married, different requirements may apply. Please contact your plan administrator for further information, if applicable.

· If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed in one lump sum.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax advisor, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

20


You may make 2 basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Second, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed Payments

You will receive fixed annuity payments, there are no variable annuity payments available. Fixed annuity payments are based on a fixed rate and the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. Each periodic annuity payment will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our General Account.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS.

1. Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

2. Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

3. Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments during the lifetime of the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 66 2/3% or 100% of the original amount payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 66 2/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.

4. Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee, guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 10 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the lower the payment amount.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:

· the Owner;

· the Joint Owner;

· the Beneficiary; or

· the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:

·  the Joint Owner;

· the Beneficiary; or

· the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

21


Your Annuity Payments

Payment Frequency

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments. If the initial annuity payment will be less than $250, we may terminate the Contract and pay you the Net Contract Value.

Payment Amount

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of your annuity payments, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

The guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 1.5% and the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. Fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. Any death benefit payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which is the day on which we receive, In Proper Form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple Beneficiaries, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, In Proper Form, from any Beneficiary. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other Beneficiaries will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the Contract (see Death BenefitsSpousal Continuation). In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax advisor before making a death benefit election.

The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:

·  Owner,

·  Joint Owner,

· Beneficiary, or

· Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the Contract Value as of that day. We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date. The spousal continuation election must be made by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner for Non-Qualified Contracts, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death falls for Qualified Contracts. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract

22


Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds.

A Joint Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract. Under IRS Guidelines, once a surviving spouse continues the Contract, the Contract may not be continued again in the event the surviving spouse remarries. If you have purchased an optional living benefit Rider, please refer to the Rider attached to your Contract to determine how any guaranteed amounts may be affected when a surviving spouse continues the Contract.

If the optional Return of Purchase Payments or Stepped-Up Death Benefit is purchased. An Add-In Amount may be added to the death benefit proceeds if the surviving spouse continues the Contract. This “Add-In Amount” is the difference between the Contract Value and the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable. The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. The Add-In Amount is not treated as a new Purchase Payment.

Example: On the Notice Date, the Owner’s surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract. On that date, the death benefit proceeds were $100,000 and the Contract Value was $85,000. Since the surviving spouse elected to continue the Contract in lieu of receiving the death benefit proceeds, we will increase the Contract Value by an Add-In Amount of $15,000 ($100,000 - $85,000 = $15,000). If the Contract Value on the Notice Date was $100,000 or higher, then nothing would be added to the Contract Value.

The continuing spouse is subject to the same fees, charges and expenses applicable to the deceased Owner of the Contract.

Death of Annuitant

If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable (unless owned by a Non-Natural Owner). The designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order:

· a surviving Joint Annuitant, or

· a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

Death of Owner

If an Owner dies before the sole surviving Annuitant and before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Natural Owner

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there are Joint or Contingent Annuitants, the death benefit proceeds will be payable on proof of death of the first annuitant. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner (however, under the terms of your Contract, you cannot change the Primary Annuitant). The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefits Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the 5th anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, In Proper Form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the 1st anniversary of the Owner’s death, the option to receive annuity payments is no longer available. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

23


The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

Under IRS regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 457(b), 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the 5th anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”), and is only available on Contracts where the Annuitant dies before their RMDs have begun.

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects not to do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy. If the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the 1st anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:

· December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or

· December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 70½.

You are responsible for monitoring distributions that must be taken to meet IRS guidelines.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit

This optional Rider allows you to have your Death Benefit Amount, as of the Notice Date, be the greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments. The Notice Date is the day on which we receive, In Proper Form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of any death benefit proceeds. An Owner change may only be elected if the age of any new Owner is 75 years or younger on the effective date of the Owner change (see the Owner Change subsection below).

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase this Rider after the Contract Date. This Rider may only be purchased if the age of each Owner and Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date. If this Rider is purchased, you may not purchase any Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Rider (Single or Joint).

Rider Terms

Total Adjusted Purchase Payments – The sum of all Purchase Payments made to the Contract, reduced by a Pro Rata Reduction for each prior withdrawal. This amount may be adjusted if there is an Owner change.

Pro Rata Reduction – The reduction percentage that is calculated at the time of the withdrawal by dividing the amount of each withdrawal by the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less than the sum of all Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.

How the Rider Works

If you purchase this Rider at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the death of any Contract Owner, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

(a) the Contract Value as of the Notice Date.

(b) Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Notice Date.

Owner Change

If there is an Owner change to someone other than the previous Owner’s spouse, to a Trust or non-natural entity where the Owner and Annuitant are not the same person prior to the Owner change, or if an Owner is added that is not the Owner’s spouse, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments will be reset to equal the lesser of:

· the Contract Value as of the effective date of the Owner change (“Change Date”), or

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date.

24


After the Change Date, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments will be increased by any Purchase Payments made after the Change Date and will be reduced by any Pro Rata Reduction for any withdrawals made after the Change Date. An Owner change to a Trust or non-natural entity where the Owner and the Annuitant are the same person prior to the Owner change will not trigger a reset.

Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds subsection.

See APPENDIX C: RETURN OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS DEATH BENEFIT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Termination

The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

· the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

· the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract (except where the spouse of the deceased Owner continues the Contract, see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS Spousal Continuation),

· the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

· the Annuity Date.

The Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the oldest Owner’s or Annuitant’s 81st birthday) increased by the amount of additional Purchase Payments and decreased by withdrawals that you make. An Owner change may only be elected if the age of any new Owner is 75 years or younger on the effective date of the Owner change (see the Owner Change subsection below).

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase this Rider after the Contract Date. This Rider may only be purchased if the age of each Owner and Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date. If this Rider is purchased, you may not purchase any Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Rider (Single or Joint).

Rider Terms

Death Benefit Amount – As of any Business Day prior to the Annuity Date, the Death Benefit Amount is equal to the greater of:

(a) the Contract Value as of that day, or

(b) Total Adjusted Purchase Payments.

Total Adjusted Purchase Payments – The sum of all Purchase Payments made to the Contract, reduced by a Pro Rata Reduction for each prior withdrawal. This amount may be adjusted if there is an Owner change.

Pro Rata Reduction – The reduction percentage that is calculated at the time of the withdrawal by dividing the amount of each withdrawal by the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less than the sum of all Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.

How the Rider Works

If you purchase this Rider at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the death of any Contract Owner, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:

(a) the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

(b) the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the death of any Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:

First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs before death benefit proceeds become payable and before the oldest Owner or Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).

We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

25


· adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and

· subtracting a Pro Rata Reduction for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase this Rider. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Owner Change

If there is an Owner change to someone other than the previous Owner’s spouse, to a Trust or non-natural entity where the Owner and Annuitant are not the same person prior to the Owner change, or if an Owner is added that is not the Owner’s spouse, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments will be reset to equal the lesser of:

· the Contract Value as of the effective date of the Owner change (“Change Date”), or

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date.

After the Change Date, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments will be increased by any Purchase Payments made after the Change Date and will be reduced by any Pro Rata Reduction for any withdrawals made after the Change Date. An Owner change to a Trust or non-natural entity where the Owner and the Annuitant are the same person prior to the Owner change will not trigger a reset.

We calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been on each Contract Anniversary that occurs after the Change Date (before death benefit proceeds become payable) and before the oldest Owner or Annuitant reaches his or her 81st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).

We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:

· adding the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments received by us since that Milestone Date, and

· subtracting a Pro Rata Reduction for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase this Rider. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds subsection.

See APPENDIX C: RETURN OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS DEATH BENEFIT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Death of Annuitant

If the sole surviving Annuitant dies:

· before the Owner,

· before the first Milestone Date, and

· before the Annuity Date,

the death benefit payable will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount (as defined in this Rider) as of the Notice Date.

If the sole surviving Annuitant dies:

· before the Owner,

· after the first Milestone Date, and

· before the Annuity Date,

the death benefit payable will be equal to the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (as defined in this Rider) and the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

Death of Owner

If the Owner dies:

· before the sole surviving Annuitant,

· before the first Milestone Date, and

· before the Annuity Date,

26


the death benefit payable will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount (as defined in this Rider) as of the Notice Date.

If the Owner dies:

· before the sole surviving Annuitant,

· after the first Milestone Date, and

· before the Annuity Date,

the death benefit payable will be equal to the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (as defined in this Rider) and the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

Termination

The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:

· the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

· the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract (except where the spouse of the deceased Owner continues the Contract, see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS Spousal Continuation),

· the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

· the Annuity Date.

The Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require a 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately.

Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Contract Value of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will not terminate your Contract if a partial withdrawal reduces the Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000 and there is an optional withdrawal benefit rider in effect.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available for withdrawal is your Contract Value at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable optional Rider Charges, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. If you own optional Riders, taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the allowed annual withdrawal amount under a Rider, may result in adverse consequences such as a reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under the Rider.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its

27


taxable portion and may be subject to a tax penalty of 10% if you have not reached age 59½. Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI. If you have a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider in effect, pre-authorized withdrawals cannot take place on your Contract Anniversary.

Special Requirements for Withdrawals and Payments to Third Party Payees

If you wish to have a full or partial withdrawal check made payable to a third-party payee, you must provide complete instructions and the request may require an original signature and/or signature guarantee.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) except in cases of your:

· severance from employment,

· death,

· disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,

· distributions upon termination of a Qualified Plan,

· reaching age 59½, or

· hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax advisor and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law or if you are replacing another annuity contract or life insurance policy. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made. If you return your Contract and it is post-marked during the Free Look period, it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract In Proper Form. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amount that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges, and minus any additional amount credited as described in CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Waivers and Reduced Charges. You bear the investment risk on any additional amount credited. Your refund amount may be subject to income tax consequences, which include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor before cancelling your Contract for a refund.

In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments. If your Contract was issued in such a state and you cancel your Contract during the Free Look period, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value. In addition, if your Contract was issued as an IRA and you return your Contract within 7 calendar days after you receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.

28


Your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by state law. If state law requires that your Purchase Payments must be allocated to Investment Options different than you requested, we will comply with state requirements. At the end of the Free Look period, we will allocate your Purchase Payments based on your allocation instructions.

See ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONState Considerations.

For replacement business, the Free Look period may be extended and the amount returned (Purchase Payment versus Contract Value) may be different than for non-replacement business. Please consult with your Schwab Financial Consultant if you have any questions regarding your state’s Free Look period and the amount of any refund.

You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is issued.

OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS

General Information

Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state availability) and may be discontinued for purchase at anytime without prior notice. Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with your Schwab Financial Consultant for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. Any guarantees provided through optional riders are backed by the financial strength and claims-paying ability of Pacific Life. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Schwab is not responsible for any optional Rider guarantees.

Living benefit riders available through this Contract, for an additional cost, are categorized as guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders. The following is a list (which may change from time to time) of riders currently available:

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit

· Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

· Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders focus on providing an income stream for life through withdrawals during the accumulation phase, if certain conditions are met. The riders have the same basic structure with differences in the percentage that may be withdrawn each year, how long the withdrawals may last (for example, for a single life or for joint lives), and what age lifetime withdrawals may begin, if applicable. The riders also offer the potential to lock in market gains on each Contract Anniversary which may increase the annual amount you may withdraw each year under the rider. The riders provide an income stream regardless of market performance, even if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

You can find complete information about each optional rider and its key features and benefits below.

You may purchase an optional Rider at anytime (if available). Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form. If an optional death benefit rider is purchased, you may not purchase a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit (Single or Joint).

Distributions made due to a request for partial annuitization, divorce instructions or under Code Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments) are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may adversely affect Rider benefits.

Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.

Schwab may limit you from purchasing some optional Riders based upon your age or other factors. You should work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to decide whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to review the different riders available for purchase, how they function, how the riders differ from one another, and to understand all of the terms and conditions of an optional rider prior to purchase.

Investment Allocation Requirements

At initial purchase of an optional living benefit rider and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate your Contract Value 100% among allowable Investment Options. Currently, the allowable Investment Options are as follows:

   

Allowable Investment Options

 

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio

 

Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio

 

29


   

Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio

 

You may transfer your entire Contract Value between allowable Investment Options, subject to certain transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions. Keep in mind that you must allocate your entire Contract Value among the allowable Investment Options. If you do not allocate your entire Purchase Payment or Contract Value according to the requirements above, your Rider will terminate.

Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment Options listed in the table above.

By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or allowable Investment Options at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders (for example, changes in an underlying portfolio’s investment objective and principal investment strategies, or changes in general market conditions), or otherwise. Generally, a change to an existing allowable Investment Option will not require you to reallocate or transfer the total amount of Contract Value allocated to an affected Investment Option, except when an underlying portfolio is liquidated by a determination of its Board of Directors or by a fund substitution. If a change is required that will result in a reallocation or transfer of an existing Investment Option, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally 90 calendar days unless we are required to give less notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your rider will terminate.

We will send you written notice in the event any transaction made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for failure to invest according to the investment allocation requirements. However, you will have 10 Business Days starting from the date of our written notice (“10 day period”), to instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue participation in an allowable asset allocation program or allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider. If you take appropriate corrective action and continue the Rider, the Rider benefits and features available immediately before the terminating event will remain in effect.

Asset allocation does not guarantee future results, ensure a profit, or protect against losses. The investment allocation requirements may reduce overall volatility in investment performance, may reduce investment returns, and may reduce the likelihood that we will be required to make payments under the optional living benefit riders. The reduction in volatility permits us to more effectively provide the guarantees under the Contract.

Multiple Rider Ownership

Only one guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.

Withdrawal Benefit Rider Exchanges

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange between Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint) on any Contract Anniversary.

When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The Initial Protected Payment Base under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Generally, if your Contract Value is lower than the Protected Payment Base under your existing Rider, your election to exchange from one rider to another may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, and Protected Payment Amount. In other words, your existing protected balances will not carryover to the new Rider. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge and the terms and conditions for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange may be elected each Contract Year. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing an exchange.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit IX Rider – Single Life in the Contract’s Rider)

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider if the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase, the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA or Inherited Roth IRA and you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements. You may not purchase this Rider if you have an optional death benefit rider in effect.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

30


Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0); however, once the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) reaches age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013), the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut).

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. On the Rider Effective Date, the Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or, if purchased after Contract issue, the Contract Value as of the Rider Effective Date.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective.

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013), this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. On each Contract Anniversary, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset will increase the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 59½, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment

31


Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

· such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

· you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen, and

· the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only.

See example 6 in APPENDIX A for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:

· the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner),

· the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

· no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

· the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

32


Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received after the 1st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date, to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval.

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:

· the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

· the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates upon the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if available). The existing protected balances will not carry over to the new Rider and will be based on the Contract Value at time of re-purchase.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

· the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

· the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

· for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any Annuitant, including Primary and Joint Annuitants,

· the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

· the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut,

· The day the contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant (if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),

· the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

· the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

· the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

· the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013).

33


See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX A. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit IX Rider – Joint Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

(You may not purchase this Rider if you have an optional death benefit rider in effect.)

You may purchase this optional Rider if you meet the following eligibility requirements:

· the Contract is issued as:

· Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner is a trust or other entity), or

· Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A or 408(p), except for Inherited IRAs and Inherited Roth IRAs,

· both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,

· you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

· the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or assume ownership of the Contract, and

· any Annuitant must be a Designated Life.

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:

· a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

· Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

· if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added after Contract issue, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

Designated Lives (each a “Designated Life”) Designated Lives must be natural persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is in effect.

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:

· be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA), or

· remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4.5% (5% if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 4.5% (5% if the Rider

34


Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013), the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4.5% (5% if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. On the Rider Effective Date, the Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or, if purchased after Contract issue, the Contract Value as of the Rider Effective Date.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective.

Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law. If the Contract is a custodial owned IRA, the Annuitant’s spouse who is treated as the Annuitant’s spouse pursuant to federal law.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA).

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013), this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. On each Contract Anniversary, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the youngest Designated Life is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4.5% (5% if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) of the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset will increase the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 59½, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4.5% (5% if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX B for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater

35


than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX B for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:

· such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

· you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

· the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

· the youngest Designated Life is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older.

See example 6 in APPENDIX B for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified ContractsRequired Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013) or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:

· the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

· the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

· no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

· the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

36


If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received after the 1st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date, to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval.

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:

· the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

· the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies and the Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Rider terminates.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status, including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You are strongly advised to work with your Schwab Financial Consultant and consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes to your Contract.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:

· the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

· the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

· upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

· upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

· if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

· the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

· the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),

· the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

· the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

· the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

· the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 65 (59½ if the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2013).

37


See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company domiciled in Nebraska. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2015, we had $483.8 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $113 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation. Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, LLC (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into a selling agreement with Schwab, whose Schwab Financial Consultants are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The Separate Account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account may not be the sole investor in the Funds. Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the Prospectus and SAI for the Funds for more information.

FEDERAL TAX ISSUES

The following summary of federal income tax issues is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. Neither we, nor Schwab or Schwab Financial

38


Consultants make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax advisor for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract. Additional tax information is included in the SAI. We reserve the right to amend this Contract without the Owner’s consent to reflect any clarifications that may be needed or are appropriate to maintain its tax qualification or to conform this Contract to any applicable changes in the tax qualification requirements.

Diversification Requirements and Investor Control

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements in order for the contract to be treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the contract meet these requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Fund SAIs.

In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable annuities. For more information regarding investor control, please refer to the contract SAI.

Taxation of Annuities – General Provisions

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Non-Qualified Contracts – General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax advisor if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Taxes Payable

A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received. An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the Contract or if any portion of the Contract is transferred, pledged or assigned. See the Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract section below. Increases in Contract Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Beginning in 2013, any taxable distribution of the investment income from your Contract may also be subject to a net investment income tax of 3.8%. This tax applies to various investment income such as interest, dividends, royalties, payments from annuities, and the disposition of property, but only to the extent a taxpayer’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds ($200,000 for individuals/$250,000 if married filing jointly). Please speak to your tax advisor about this tax.

Non-Natural Persons as Owners

If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts, may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons. Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs, partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non-natural persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.

Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract

The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax advisor for more information.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals Prior to the Annuity Date

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, including registered investment advisory fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Purchase Payments reduced by non-taxable amounts previously

39


received (investment in the Contract), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Purchase Payments. Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of: a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the amount by which your Contract Value immediately before you receive the distribution exceeds your investment in the Contract at that time.

Exceptions to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts issued and investments made before August 14, 1982.

If at the time of a partial withdrawal your Contract Value does not exceed your investment in the Contract, then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and will simply reduce your investment in the Contract.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. You should consult your tax advisor for additional information regarding taking a partial or a full distribution from your Contract.

Multiple Contracts (Aggregation Rule)

Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the amount includable in gross income under Code Section 72(e)) prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and the investments in the Contracts should be added together to determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e). Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The Treasury Department has specific authority under Code Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.

10% Tax Penalty Applicable to Certain Withdrawals and Annuity Payments

The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:

· made on or after the date you reach age 59½,

· made by a Beneficiary after your death,

· attributable to your becoming disabled,

· any payments annuitized using a life contingent annuity option,

· attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to August 14, 1982, or

· any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (Code Section 72(q) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the applicable Qualified Contracts).

Distributions After the Annuity Date

After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Purchase Payments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a tax penalty.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a tax penalty if taken prior to age 59½.

For periodic (annuity) payments, we will default your state tax withholding (as applicable) based upon the marital status and allowance(s) provided for your federal taxes or, if no withholding instructions are provided, we will default to either a married person with 3 exemptions or your resident state’s prescribed withholding default (if applicable). Please consult with a tax advisor for additional information, including whether your resident state has a specific version of the W-4P form that should be submitted to us with state-specific income tax information.

Distributions to Beneficiary After Contract Owner’s Death

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except that the early withdrawal tax penalty does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions.

40


If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

Contract Owner’s Estate

Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 37½ or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax (GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have questions about federal estate tax, IRD, or GSTT.

Gifts of Annuity Contracts

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

Tax Withholding for Non-Qualified Contracts

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations. For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to provide us with withholding information at the time of your withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

Please call (800) 722-4448 with any questions about the required withholding information. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.

Tax Withholding for Non-resident Aliens or Non U.S. Persons

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract. Currently, we require all Contract Owners to be a U.S. person (citizen) or a U.S. resident alien.

Exchanges of Non-Qualified Contracts (1035 Exchanges)

You may make your initial or an additional Purchase Payment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section of the form that you are making a 1035 exchange and submitting any applicable state replacement form. The form is available by calling your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. If you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823. Once completed, the form should be mailed to Pacific Life. If you are making an initial Purchase Payment, a completed Contract application should also be attached.

A post-death 1035 exchange of Non-Qualified assets may be available for beneficiaries who have elected to receive lifetime payments under Section 72(s) of the Code. Note that we reserve the right to restrict the maximum issue age for this type of transaction. Additionally, we will not accept additional purchase payments or allow a change in ownership (including collateral assignment requests) for a Contract issued via a post-death 1035 exchange of Non-Qualified assets.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax advisor prior to affecting a 1035 exchange.

Partial 1035 Exchanges and Annuitization

A partial exchange is the direct transfer of only a portion of an existing annuity’s Contract Value to a new annuity contract. Under Rev. Proc. 2011-38 a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if there are no distributions, from either

41


annuity, within 180 days after the partial 1035 exchange. Any distribution taken during the 180 days may jeopardize the tax-free treatment of the partial exchange. Such determination will be made by the IRS, using general tax principals, to determine the substance, and thus the treatment of the transaction. In addition, annuity payments that are based on one or more lives or for a period of 10 or more years (as described in Code Section 72(a)(2)) will not be treated as a distribution from either the old or new contract when determining whether the tax treatment described in Rev. Proc. 2011-38 will apply. Rev. Proc. 2011-38 applies to partial exchanges and partial annuitizations on or after October 24, 2011.

You should consult your tax advisor prior to affecting a partial 1035 exchange or a partial annuitization.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is a maximum of 20% (as low as 0% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 39.6% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity prior to attaining age 59½ may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax advisor regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to investments in your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal, state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.

Qualified Contracts – General Rules

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith.

Tax Deferral

It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. Other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among Investment Options . You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan or IRA.

42


Registered Investment Advisory Fees

For Qualified Contracts, withdrawals to pay registered investment advisory fees will not be treated as distributions for tax purposes, and therefore will not be reported on a Form 1099-R.

Taxes Payable

Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that they are not treated as a tax free recovery of after-tax contributions (if any). Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated as ordinary income. Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.

10% Tax Penalty for Early Withdrawals

Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that occur before you attain age 59½ are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:

· made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s death,

· attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under Section 72(m)(7),

· that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,

· for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),

· used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses (IRAs only),

· for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs only), and

· (except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from service if the employee separates from service during or after the calendar year in which he or she attains age 55 (or age 50 in the case of a qualified public safety employee).

Tax Withholding for Qualified Contracts

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:

· the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or

· the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to 10% federal withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. Treasury Regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these Regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The IRS could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental. In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, Treasury or the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider

43


charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with Treasury Regulations or IRS guidance.

Required Minimum Distributions

The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year. The information below is for Qualified Contracts held in either a Qualified Plan, or IRA, prior to the annuity start date.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant no later than the Owner/Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 70½. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 70½, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these Regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn age 70½.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Regulations (Treas. Reg. Sec. 1.401(a)(9)-9). Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following calendar year.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable Regulations thereunder.

Actuarial Value

In accordance with regulations, RMDs and Roth IRA conversions may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs and taxes due on Roth IRA Conversions may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

RMDs and Annuity Options

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:

· no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 70½, and

· must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 66 2/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available.

IRAs and Qualified Plans

The following is only a general discussion about types of IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should

44


consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax advisor. You should also consult with a qualified tax advisor and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code Section 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401, or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis.

Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have not attained age 70½ and who have compensation (as defined by the Code) of at least the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code and Treasury Regulations must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 70½. Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 59½. In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will generally include employee salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 457(b) or other Qualified Plan after the required 2-year period.

SEP-IRAs

A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored retirement plan under which employers are allowed to make contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k). Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 59½.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax advisor.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

One IRA Rollover Per Year

Effective January 1, 2015, the IRS will only permit a taxpayer to complete one 60-day indirect IRA-to-IRA rollover per 12 month period. This means that a taxpayer could not make a 60-day indirect IRA-to-IRA rollover if he or she had made such a rollover

45


involving any of the taxpayer's IRAs in the preceding 1-year period. This rule does not affect the ability of an IRA owner to transfer funds from one IRA trustee directly to another, because such a transfer is not a rollover (but rather a direct transfer) and therefore, is not subject to the one-rollover-per-year limitation of Code Section 408(d)(3)(B). For additional information, see IRS Announcements 2014-15 and 2014-32. Always confirm with your own tax advisor whether this rule impacts your circumstances.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Certain employees of governmental entities or tax exempt employers may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code Section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to plan provisions and a qualifying triggering event, assets in a 457(b) plan established by a governmental entity may be transferred or rolled into an IRA or another Qualified Plan, if the Qualified Plan allows the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to IRA rules, including the 10% penalty on distributions prior to age 59½. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the 457(b) plan allows the rollover and if the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election. Assets in a 457(b) plan set up by a tax exempt employer may not be rolled to a different type of Qualified Plan or IRA at any time.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:

· your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by

· the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s)

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax advisor before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint Owners, must be under the age of 91 at the time of change or addition. Additionally, further age limitations may apply if the Contract was issued with an optional death benefit rider. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners. Contract ownership changes may change the Return of Purchase Payments and Stepped-Up Death Benefit calculations. In addition, Contract ownership changes may terminate certain optional living benefit riders. See the Termination subsection for a particular optional living benefit rider. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to making any ownership changes.

46


If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 401 or 457(b), the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code Section 408, you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See ANNUITIZATIONSelecting Your Annuitant. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract before the Annuity Date or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. See the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS section for additional information regarding death benefit payouts. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, In Proper Form, and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded. Under our administrative procedures, a signature guarantee and/or other verification of identity or authenticity may be required when processing a claim payable to a Beneficiary.

Spousal consent may be required to change an IRA Beneficiary. If you are considering removing a spouse as a Beneficiary, it is recommended that you consult your legal or tax advisor regarding any applicable state or federal laws prior to requesting the change. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. Required approvals of the SEC and applicable state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:

· cease offering any Subaccount;

· add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;

· add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;

· permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;

· add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;

· combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;

· register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;

· operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;

· run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;

· restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;

· make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;

47


· make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;

· make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;

· suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and

· comply with applicable law.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach Pacific Life service representatives at (800) 722-4448 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to our Service Center:

Pacific Life Insurance Company

P.O. Box 2378

Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

If you are submitting a Purchase Payment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to our Service Center at the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company

P.O. Box 2290

Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to our Service Center at the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company

6750 Mercy Road, 4th Floor, RSD

Omaha, Nebraska 68106

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we receive the notice or instructions In Proper Form. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from Schwab, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. In those instances when information regarding your Purchase Payment is electronically transmitted to us by Schwab, we will consider the Purchase Payment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us if you or your Schwab Financial Consultant have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Purchase Payment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Purchase Payments after your initial Purchase Payment, transfer requests and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them In Proper Form unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them In Proper Form unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. We may also require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; or an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, In Proper Form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment In Proper Form. You should call your Schwab Financial Consultant or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act

48


upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Information Consent

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide prospectuses, prospectus supplements, annual and semi-annual reports, annual statements, quarterly statements and immediate confirmations, proxy solicitation, privacy notice and other notices and documentation in electronic format when available instead of receiving paper copies of these documents by U.S. mail. You may enroll in this service by so indicating on the application, via our Internet website, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. Not all contract documentation and notifications may be currently available in electronic format. You will continue to receive paper copies of any documents and notifications not available in electronic format by U.S. mail. By enrolling in this service, you consent to receive in electronic format any documents added in the future. For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting to receive information electronically. Documents will be available on our Internet website. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You must have ready access to a computer with Internet access, an active e-mail account to receive this information electronically, and the ability to read and retain it. You may access and print all documents provided through this service.

If you plan on enrolling in this service, or are currently enrolled, please note that:

· We impose no additional charge for electronic delivery, although your Internet provider may charge for Internet access.

· You must provide a current e-mail address and notify us promptly when your e-mail address changes.

· You must update any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications from us.

· You may request a paper copy of the information at any time for no charge, even though you consented to electronic delivery, or if you decide to revoke your consent.

· For jointly owned contracts, all information will be provided to the e-mail address that is provided to us.

· Electronic delivery will be cancelled if e-mails are returned undeliverable.

· This consent will remain in effect until you revoke it.

We are not required to deliver this information electronically and may discontinue electronic delivery in whole or in part at any time. If you are currently enrolled in this service, please call (800) 722-4448 if you would like to revoke your consent, wish to receive a paper copy of the information above, or need to update your e-mail address.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following business day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Payments (including fixed annuity payments), withdrawals or transfers from the General Account may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Purchase Payments and transfers, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal and optional living benefit rider Automatic Resets. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized investment program, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

49


You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses, environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus, supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same household address (Householding). If you are already participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow 30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may also elect to participate in Householding by writing or calling us. The current documents are available on our website any time or an individual copy of any of these documents may be requested – see the last page of this Prospectus for more information.

Cybersecurity

Our business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners. As a result, our business is potentially susceptible to operational and information security risks associated with the technologies, processes and practices designed to protect networks, systems, computers, programs and data from attack, damage or unauthorized access. These risks include, among other things, the theft, loss, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, denial of service on websites and other operational disruption, and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Cyber-attacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the underlying Funds, intermediaries, and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, cyber-attacks may interfere with contract transaction processing, including the processing of orders from our website or with the underlying Funds; impact our ability to calculate Accumulated Unit Values, Subaccount Unit Values or an underlying Fund to calculate a net asset value; cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information; impede order processing; subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses; and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the underlying Funds invest, which may cause the Funds underlying your Contract to lose value. The constant change in technologies and increased sophistication and activities of hackers and others, continue to pose new and significant cybersecurity threats. While measures have been developed that are designed to reduce cybersecurity risks, there can be no guarantee or assurance that we, the underlying Funds, or our service providers will not suffer losses affecting your Contract due to cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future.

Distribution Arrangements

We and PSD, our broker-dealer and subsidiary, entered into a selling agreement with Schwab. The contracts are sold exclusively through Schwab and Schwab is not affiliated with us or PSD. PSD and Schwab are registered as broker-dealers with the SEC and are members of The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). Schwab is a subsidiary of The Charles Schwab Corporation and an affiliate of CSIM, the investment adviser for the Schwab Annuity Portfolios and the Schwab ETFs including certain ETFs in which the Schwab Annuity Portfolios will invest.

PSD pays Schwab compensation for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. The individual Schwab Financial Consultant who sells you a Contract typically will receive a portion of the compensation under the Schwab Financial Consultant’s own arrangement with Schwab. PSD pays Schwab an annual trail commission of 0.20% of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission.

Additional Compensation and Revenue Sharing

To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, Schwab may receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called “revenue sharing”, as mutually agreed to by PSD and Schwab. These additional compensation or reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in connection with the firm’s “due diligence” examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences or seminars, sales or training programs for invited Schwab Financial Consultants and other employees, payments for travel expenses, including lodging, incurred by Schwab Financial Consultants and other employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or promotions in which participating firms and their salespersons may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to Schwab Financial Consultants that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that Schwab markets the Contracts.

These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. Any such compensation will not result in any additional direct charge to you by us.

The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your Schwab Financial Consultant or Schwab to present this Contract over other investment vehicles available in the marketplace. You may ask your Schwab Financial Consultant about these differing and divergent interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how Schwab is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

50


Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

State Considerations

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are available or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your Schwab Financial Consultant or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state.

California Applicants Age 60 or Older

For residents of the state of California 60 years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are a California applicant age 60 or older, you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and return your Contract to us.

If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option, the following will apply:

· We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date. On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer your Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount Value according to the instructions on your application, or your most recent instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable Investment Options according to your initial allocation instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATEDTransfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

· If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion of any additional Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable Investment Option other than the Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

· If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract Value from the Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount to any other Variable Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

· If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Purchase Payments.

If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the following will apply:

· We will immediately allocate any Purchase Payments we receive to the Investment Options you select on your application or your most recent instructions, if any.

· If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.

· Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.

Financial Statements

Pacific Life’s financial statements are contained in the Statement of Additional Information. The financial statements of Separate Account A are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A.

Rule 12h-7 Representation

In reliance on the exemption provided by Rule 12h-7 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“34 Act”), we do not intend to file periodic reports as required under the 34 Act.

51


THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

We manage our General Account assets, subject to investment policies, objectives, directions, and guidelines established by our Board. You will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets. Unlike the Separate Account, the General Account is subject to liabilities arising from any of our other business. Any guarantees provided for under the contract or through optional riders are backed by Pacific Life’s financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Payments (including fixed annuity payments), withdrawals or transfers from the General Account (including any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option) may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective.

52


CONTENTS OF THE STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

PERFORMANCE

Total Returns

Yields

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

Power of Tax Deferral

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, LLC (PSD)

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

Corresponding Dates

Age and Sex of Annuitant

Systematic Transfer Program

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

More on Federal Tax Issues

Safekeeping of Assets

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

You can receive a copy of the Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity SAI without charge by calling us at (800) 722-4448. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.

53


APPENDIX A:

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT (SINGLE)
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· No withdrawals taken.

· Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$5,000

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$10,350

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350 (5% x $207,000).

54


In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$5,000

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$10,350

Activity

 

$5,000

$216,490
(after $5,000 withdrawal)

$207,000

$5,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$216,490

$207,000

$10,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$216,490

$216,490

$10,825

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This reset increases the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350 (5% × $207,000).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount after the automatic reset at the Year 3 Contract Anniversary is equal to $10,825 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

55


           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$5,000

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$10,350

Activity

 

$30,000

$165,000
(after $30,000 withdrawal)

$184,975

$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$192,000

$184,975

$9,249

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$192,000

$192,000

$9,600

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 – $10,350 = $19,650.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $19,650 ÷ ($195,000 – $10,350) = 0.1064 or 10.64%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage computed above: $207,000 – ($207,000 × 10.64%) = $184,975.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 5% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year:
(5% × $207,000) – $30,000 = -$19,650 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an automatic reset occurs that increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that date. (Compare the balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary Prior to and After Automatic Reset).

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 62 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$0

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$0

Activity

 

$25,000

$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)

$182,000

$0

56


           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$196,490

$182,000

$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$196,490

$196,490

$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$205,000

$196,490

$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$205,000

$205,000

$10,250

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $0 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ÷ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the greater of (a) the total withdrawal amount ($25,000) and (b) the reduction percentage ($207,000 × 11.29%) = $23,370. Since $25,000 is greater than $23,370, the new Protected Payment Base is computed by subtracting $25,000 from the prior Protected Payment Base: $207,000 – $25,000 = $182,000.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) has not reached age 65.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $10,250 (5% × $205,000) since the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) reached age 65.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year

           

Activity
Date

RMD
Withdrawal

Non-RMD
Withdrawal

Annual
RMD
Amount

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$5,000

01/01/2007

   

$7,500

   

03/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$3,125

05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$5,000

06/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$3,125

09/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$1,250

12/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$0

01/01/2008

   

$8,000

   

03/15/2008

$2,000

   

$100,000

$0

57


           

Activity
Date

RMD
Withdrawal

Non-RMD
Withdrawal

Annual
RMD
Amount

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

05/01/2008
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$5,000

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.

           

Activity
Date

RMD
Withdrawal

Non-RMD
Withdrawal

Annual
RMD
Amount

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary

   

$0

$100,000

$5,000

01/01/2007

   

$7,500

   

03/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$3,125

04/01/2007

 

$2,000

 

$100,000

$1,125

05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$5,000

06/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$3,125

09/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$1,250

11/15/2007

 

$4,000

 

$96,900

$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,900.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:

· Contract Value = $90,000

· Protected Payment Base = $100,000

· Protected Payment Amount = $1,250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal – amount Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 – $1,250 = $2,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value – Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750 ÷ ($90,000 – $1,250); $2,750 ÷ $88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).

58


Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 – ratio); $100,000 × (1 – 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

· No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.

· Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.

· No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.

· Death occurred during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.

         

Contract
Year

Withdrawal

End of Year
Contract Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

1

$5,000

$96,489

$100,000

$5,000

2

$5,000

$92,410

$100,000

$5,000

3

$5,000

$88,543

$100,000

$5,000

4

$5,000

$84,627

$100,000

$5,000

5

$5,000

$80,662

$100,000

$5,000

6

$5,000

$76,648

$100,000

$5,000

7

$5,000

$72,583

$100,000

$5,000

8

$5,000

$68,467

$100,000

$5,000

9

$5,000

$64,299

$100,000

$5,000

10

$5,000

$60,078

$100,000

$5,000

11

$5,000

$55,805

$100,000

$5,000

12

$5,000

$51,478

$100,000

$5,000

13

$5,000

$47,096

$100,000

$5,000

14

$5,000

$42,660

$100,000

$5,000

15

$5,000

$38,168

$100,000

$5,000

16

$5,000

$33,619

$100,000

$5,000

17

$5,000

$29,013

$100,000

$5,000

18

$5,000

$24,349

$100,000

$5,000

19

$5,000

$19,626

$100,000

$5,000

20

$5,000

$14,844

$100,000

$5,000

21

$5,000

$10,002

$100,000

$5,000

22

$5,000

$5,099

$100,000

$5,000

23

$5,000

$0

$100,000

$5,000

24

$5,000

$0

$100,000

$5,000

25

$5,000

$0

$100,000

$5,000

26

$5,000

$0

$100,000

$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

59


· Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

60


APPENDIX B:

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT (JOINT)
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Designated Life is 65 years old.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$4,500

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Protected Payment Amount = 4.5% of Protected Payment Base = $4,500

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Designated Life is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· No withdrawals taken.

· Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$4,500

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$9,315

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $9,000 (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $9,315 (4.5% × $207,000).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

61


Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Designated Life is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$4,500

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$9,315

Activity

 

$5,000

$216,490
(after $5,000 withdrawal)

$207,000

$4,315

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$216,490

$207,000

$9,315

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$216,490

$216,490

$9,742

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This reset increases the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $9,315 (4.5% × $207,000).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $9,315 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount after the automatic reset at the Year 3 Contract Anniversary is equal to $9,742 (4.5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Designated Life is 65 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

62


           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$4,500

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$9,315

Activity

 

$30,000

$165,000
(after $30,000 withdrawal)

$183,940

$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$192,000

$183,940

$8,277

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$192,000

$192,000

$8,640

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $9,315 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 — $9,315 = $20,685.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $20,685 ÷ ($195,000 — $9,315) = 0.1114 or 11.14%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage computed above: $207,000 — ($207,000 × 11.14%) = $183,940.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 4.5% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year: (4.5% × $207,000) — $30,000 = -$20,685 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an automatic reset occurs that increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that date. (Compare the balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary Prior to and After Automatic Reset).

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· Every Designated Life is 62 years old.

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.

· A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

· Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.

· Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.

· Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.

           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$0

Activity

$100,000

 

$200,000

$200,000

$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$200,000

$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$207,000

$207,000

$0

Activity

 

$25,000

$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)

$182,000

$0

63


           
 

Purchase Payment

Withdrawal

Contract
Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$196,490

$182,000

$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$196,490

$196,490

$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary

(Prior to Automatic Reset)

 

$205,000

$196,490

$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary

(After Automatic Reset)

 

$205,000

$205,000

$9,225

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $0 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ÷ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the greater of (a) the total withdrawal amount ($25,000) and (b) the reduction percentage ($207,000 × 11.29%) = $23,370. Since $25,000 is greater than $23,370, the new Protected Payment Base is computed by subtracting $25,000 from the prior Protected Payment Base: $207,000 — $25,000 = $182,000.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the youngest Designated Life has not reached age 65.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $9,225 (4.5% × $205,000) since the youngest Designated Life reached age 65.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year

           

Activity
Date

RMD
Withdrawal

Non-RMD
Withdrawal

Annual
RMD
Amount

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$4,500

01/01/2007

   

$7,500

   

03/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$2,625

05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$4,500

06/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$2,625

09/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$750

12/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$0

01/01/2008

   

$8,000

   

03/15/2008

$2,000

   

$100,000

$0

05/01/2008
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$4,500

64


Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.

           

Activity
Date

RMD
Withdrawal

Non-RMD
Withdrawal

Annual
RMD
Amount

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

05/01/2006
Contract
Anniversary

   

$0

$100,000

$4,500

01/01/2007

   

$7,500

   

03/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$2,625

04/01/2007

 

$2,000

 

$100,000

$625

05/01/2007
Contract
Anniversary

     

$100,000

$4,500

06/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$2,625

09/15/2007

$1,875

   

$100,000

$750

11/15/2007

 

$4,000

 

$96,360

$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $4,500 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($4,500). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($750), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,360.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:

· Contract Value = $90,000

· Protected Payment Base = $100,000

· Protected Payment Amount = $750

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $750. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $3,250 (total withdrawal amount — Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 — $750 = $3,250).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value — Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.64% ($3,250 ÷ ($90,000 — $750); $3,250 ÷ $89,250 = 0.0364 or 3.64%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,360 (Protected Payment Base × (1 — ratio); $100,000 × (1 — 3.64%); $100,000 × 96.36% = $96,360).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

65


· Every Owner and Annuitant is 65 years old.

· No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.

· Withdrawals, each equal to 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.

· No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.

· Death occurred during Contract Year 26 after the $4,500 withdrawal was made.

         

Contract
Year

Withdrawal

End of Year
Contract Value

Protected
Payment
Base

Protected
Payment
Amount

1

$4,500

$96,489

$100,000

$4,500

2

$4,500

$92,410

$100,000

$4,500

3

$4,500

$88,543

$100,000

$4,500

4

$4,500

$84,627

$100,000

$4,500

5

$4,500

$80,662

$100,000

$4,500

6

$4,500

$76,648

$100,000

$4,500

7

$4,500

$72,583

$100,000

$4,500

8

$4,500

$68,467

$100,000

$4,500

9

$4,500

$64,299

$100,000

$4,500

10

$4,500

$60,078

$100,000

$4,500

11

$4,500

$55,805

$100,000

$4,500

12

$4,500

$51,478

$100,000

$4,500

13

$4,500

$47,096

$100,000

$4,500

Activity (Death of first Designated Life)

14

$4,500

$42,660

$100,000

$4,500

15

$4,500

$38,168

$100,000

$4,500

16

$4,500

$33,619

$100,000

$4,500

17

$4,500

$29,013

$100,000

$4,500

18

$4,500

$24,349

$100,000

$4,500

19

$4,500

$19,626

$100,000

$4,500

20

$4,500

$14,844

$100,000

$4,500

21

$4,500

$10,002

$100,000

$4,500

22

$4,500

$5,099

$100,000

$4,500

23

$4,500

$0

$100,000

$4,500

24

$4,500

$0

$100,000

$4,500

25

$4,500

$0

$100,000

$4,500

26

$4,500

$0

$100,000

$4,500

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Protected Payment Amount = 4.5% of Protected Payment Base = $4,500

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($4,500), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.

66


If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life.

67


APPENDIX C:

RETURN OF PURCHASE PAYMENTS DEATH BENEFIT AND

STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the death benefit amount provided under the optional Return of Purchase Payments, the optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit, and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract may affect the values and benefits. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to reflect what your actual death benefit proceeds will be or serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Under the base Contract (no optional death benefit riders selected), the Death Benefit Amount is equal to the Contract Value.

THE EXAMPLES BELOW ASSUME NO OWNER CHANGE OR AN OWNER CHANGE TO THE PREVIOUS OWNER’S SPOUSE

Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.

· A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.

· A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 11.

         

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

1

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

2

   

$103,000

$100,000

3

   

$106,090

$100,000

Activity

$25,000

 

$133,468

$125,000

4

   

$134,458

$125,000

5

   

$138,492

$125,000

6

   

$142,647

$125,000

Activity

 

$35,000

$110,844

$95,000

7

   

$111,666

$95,000

8

   

$103,850

$95,000

9

   

$96,580

$95,000

10

   

$89,820

$95,000

11

   

$83,530

$95,000

Activity

 

$10,000

$73,530

$83,629

12

   

$68,383

$83,629

13

   

$63,596

$83,629

14
Death
Occurs

   

$59,144

$83,629

1The greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

68


On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 24.00% ($35,000 ÷ $145,844 = 0.2400 or 24.00%).

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $125,000 × (1 — 24.00%); $125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).

During Contract Year 11, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $83,629 and decreased the Contract Value to $73,530. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($83,530, which equals the $73,530 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $10,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 11.97% ($10,000 ÷ $83,530 = 0.1197 or 11.97%).

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is $83,629 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payment prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $95,000 × (1 — 11.97%); $95,000 × 88.03% = $83,629).

During Contract Year 14, death occurs. The Death Benefit Amount under the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit will be the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments ($83,629) because that amount is greater than the Contract Value ($59,144).

Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract Year 7, the Death Benefit Amount under the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit would be the Contract Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment of $95,000.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.

· A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.

· Annual Step-Ups occur on each of the first 7 Contract Anniversaries.

           

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

Guaranteed
Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit
Amount

1

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$100,000

2

   

$103,000

$100,000

$103,000

3

   

$106,090

$100,000

$106,090

Activity

$25,000

 

$133,468

$125,000

$131,090

4

   

$134,458

$125,000

$134,458

5

   

$138,492

$125,000

$138,492

6

   

$142,647

$125,000

$142,647

Activity

 

$35,000

$110,844

$95,000

$108,412

69


           

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

Guaranteed
Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit
Amount

7

   

$111,666

$95,000

$111,666

8

   

$103,850

$95,000

$111,666

9

   

$96,580

$95,000

$111,666

Death
Occurs

   

$89,820

$95,000

$111,666

1 The greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468 and the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount increased to $131,090.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount was reduced on a pro rata basis to $108,412. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment and Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 24.00% ($35,000 ÷ $145,844 = 0.2400 or 24.00%)

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $125,000 × (1 — 24.00%); $125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).

Third, determine the new Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount. The Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount is $108,412 (Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $142,647 × (1 — 24.00%); $142,647 × 76.00% = $108,412).

During Contract Year 9, death occurs. The death benefit proceeds are the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (Contract Value or Total Adjusted Purchase Payments) or the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount. The Death Benefit Amount is $95,000 because the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments ($95,000) is greater than the Contract Value ($89,820). The death benefit proceeds are equal to the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount of $111,666 because it is greater than the Death Benefit Amount (Total Adjusted Purchase Payments of $95,000).

70


THE EXAMPLES BELOW ASSUME OWNER CHANGE TO SOMEONE OTHER THAN PREVIOUS OWNER’S SPOUSE, TO A TRUST OR NON-NATURAL ENTITY WHERE THE OWNER AND ANNUITANT ARE NOT THE SAME PERSON PRIOR TO THE CHANGE OR IF AN OWNER IS ADDED THAT IS NOT A SPOUSE OF THE OWNER

Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.

· A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.

· Owner change to someone other than previous Owner’s Spouse during Contract Year 8.

· A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 11.

         

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

1

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

2

   

$103,000

$100,000

3

   

$106,090

$100,000

Activity

$25,000

 

$133,468

$125,000

4

   

$134,458

$125,000

5

   

$138,492

$125,000

6

   

$142,647

$125,000

Activity

 

$35,000

$110,844

$95,000

7

   

$111,666

$95,000

8

   

$103,850

$95,000

Owner Change

   

$100,735

$95,000

9

   

$96,580

$95,000

10

   

$89,820

$95,000

11

   

$83,530

$95,000

Activity

 

$10,000

$73,530

$83,629

12

   

$68,383

$83,629

13

   

$63,596

$83,629

14
Death
Occurs

   

$59,144

$83,629

1The greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is calculated as follows:

71


First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 24.00% ($35,000 ÷ $145,844 = 0.2400 or 24.00%).

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $125,000 × (1 — 24.00%); $125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).

During Contract Year 8, an Owner change to someone other than the previous Owner’s spouse occurred. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payments on the effective date of the Owner change (the “Change Date”) will be reset to equal the lesser of the Contract Value as of the Change Date or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date. Numerically, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount will be $95,000 since the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date ($95,000) is less than the Contract Value as of the Change Date ($100,735).

After the Change Date, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments will be increased by any Purchase Payments made after the Change Date and will be reduced by any Pro Rata Reduction for withdrawals made after the Change Date.

During Contract Year 11, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount on a pro rata basis to $83,629 and decreased the Contract Value to $73,530. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($83,530, which equals the $73,530 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $10,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 11.97% ($10,000 ÷ $83,530 = 0.1197 or 11.97%).

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount is $83,629 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount prior to the withdrawal x (1 - Pro Rata Reduction); $95,000 x (1 - 11.97%); $95,000 x 88.03% = $83,629).

During Contract Year 14, death occurs. The Death Benefit Amount under the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit will be the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments ($83,629) because that amount is greater than the Contract Value ($59,144).

Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract Year 7, the Death Benefit Amount under the Return of Purchase Payments Death Benefit would be the Contract Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment of $95,000.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

· Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

· A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.

· Owner change to someone other than previous Owner’s Spouse during Contract Year 5.

· A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.

· Annual Step-Ups occur on each of the first 7 Contract Anniversaries.

           

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

Guaranteed
Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit
Amount

1

$100,000

 

$100,000

$100,000

$100,000

2

   

$103,000

$100,000

$103,000

3

   

$106,090

$100,000

$106,090

Activity

$25,000

 

$133,468

$125,000

$131,090

4

   

$134,458

$125,000

$134,458

5

   

$138,492

$125,000

$138,492

72


           

Beginning
of Contract
Year

Purchase
Payments
Received

Withdrawal
Amount

Contract
Value1

Total Adjusted
Purchase
Payments1

Guaranteed
Minimum
(Stepped-Up)
Death Benefit
Amount

Owner Change

   

$140,569

$125,000

$125,000

6

   

$142,647

$125,000

$142,647

Activity

 

$35,000

$110,844

$95,000

$108,412

7

   

$111,666

$95,000

$111,666

8

   

$103,850

$95,000

$111,666

9

   

$96,580

$95,000

$111,666

Death
Occurs

   

$89,820

$95,000

$111,666

1 The greater of the Contract Value or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:

· Total Adjusted Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

· Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Total Adjusted Purchase Payment amount to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468 and the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount increased to $131,090.

During Contract Year 5, an Owner change to someone other than the previous Owner’s spouse occurred. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payments on the effective date of the Owner change (the “Change Date”) will be reset to equal the lesser of the Contract Value as of the Change Date or the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date. Numerically, the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount will be $125,000 since the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments as of the Change Date ($125,000) is less than the Contract Value as of the Change Date ($140,569). In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount will be reset to equal the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount ($125,000) as of the Change Date.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount was reduced on a pro rata basis to $108,412. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount and Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount are calculated as follows:

First, determine the Pro Rata Reduction. The percentage is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the percentage is 24.00% ($35,000 ÷ $145,844 = 0.2400 or 24.00%)

Second, determine the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount. The Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount is $95,000 (Total Adjusted Purchase Payments amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $125,000 × (1 — 24.00%); $125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).

Third, determine the new Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount. The Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the Pro Rata Reduction determined above. Numerically, the new Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount is $108,412 (Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 — Pro Rata Reduction); $142,647 × (1 — 24.00%); $142,647 × 76.00% = $108,412).

During Contract Year 9, death occurs. The death benefit proceeds are the greater of the Death Benefit Amount (Contract Value or Total Adjusted Purchase Payments) or the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount. The Death Benefit Amount is $95,000 because the Total Adjusted Purchase Payments ($95,000) is greater than the Contract Value ($89,820). The death benefit proceeds are equal to the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount of $111,666 because it is greater than the Death Benefit Amount (Total Adjusted Purchase Payments of $95,000).

73



FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS (CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION)

The table below is designed to help you understand how the Variable Investment Options have performed. It shows the value of a Subaccount Unit at the beginning and end of each period, as well as the number of Subaccount Units at the end of each period. A Subaccount Unit is also called an Accumulation Unit.

You should read the table in conjunction with the financial statements for Separate Account A, which are included in its annual report dated as of December 31, 2015.

 

     With Standard Death Benefit      With Stepped-Up Death Benefit
Rider
     With Premier Death Benefit
Rider
 
     AUV
at
Beginning
of Year
     AUV
at
End
of
Year
     Number of
Subaccount
Units
Outstanding
at
End of Year
     AUV
at
Beginning
of Year
     AUV
at
End
of
Year
     Number of
Subaccount
Units
Outstanding
at
End of Year
     AUV
at
Beginning
of Year
     AUV
at
End
of
Year
     Number of
Subaccount
Units
Outstanding
at
End of Year
 

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio

                          

2015

     $11.36         $11.07         4,122,549         $10.24         $9.85         10,190         $10.15         $9.87         25,561   

2014

     $10.98         $11.36         3,592,206         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

2013

     $10.33         $10.98         2,364,119         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

09/06/2012-12/31/2012

     $10.19         $10.33         194,239         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio

  

                                                                       

2015

     $11.94         $11.58         8,965,358         $10.41         $9.85         468,672         $10.41         $9.87         15,954   

2014

     $11.53         $11.94         7,816,994         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

2013

     $10.47         $11.53         5,754,492         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

10/02/2012-12/31/2012

     $10.39         $10.47         131,959         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio

                                                                                

2015

     $12.65         $12.22         9,383,742         $10.42         $9.88         178,650         $10.50         $9.90         29,251   

2014

     $12.24         $12.65         8,114,949         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

2013

     $10.66         $12.24         5,915,879         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

10/09/2012-12/31/2012

     $10.44         $10.66         30,296         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

Schwab Government Money Market Portfolio

(formerly called Schwab Money Market Portfolio)

  

  

                                                                       

2015

     $9.95         $9.89         0         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

03/18/2014-12/31/2014

     $10.00         $9.95         0         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A         N/A   

 

FH-1


SCHWAB RETIREMENT

INCOME VARIABLE

ANNUITY

 

WHERE TO GO FOR MORE INFORMATION

 

 

The Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive, P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California 92660.

If you have any questions about the

Contract, please ask your Schwab Financial Consultant or contact us.

 

You will find more information about the Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2016.

 

The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference. The contents of the SAI are described in this Prospectus – see the Table of Contents.

 

You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by visiting our website, calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.

 

How to Contact Pacific Life   Call or write our Service Center at:
 

Pacific Life Insurance Company

P.O. Box 2378

Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

 

Contract Owners: (800) 722-4448

Schwab Financial Consultants: (800) 610-4823

6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time

Send Purchase Payments, other payments and application forms to our Service Center at the following address:

 

By mail

Pacific Life Insurance Company

P.O. Box 2290

Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290

 

By overnight delivery service

Pacific Life Insurance Company

6750 Mercy Road, 4th Floor, RSD

Omaha, Nebraska 68106

 

How to Contact Schwab   Contact your Schwab Financial Consultant or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at
 

(888) 311-4887, weekdays 6 a.m. through 4:30 p.m. Pacific time.

 

How to Contact the SEC  

Commission’s Public Reference Section

 

100 F Street, NE

Washington, D.C. 20549

(202) 551-8090

Website: www.sec.gov

e-mail: publicinfo@sec.gov

 

FINRA Public Disclosure Program   The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) provides investor protection
  education through its website and printed materials. The FINRA regulation website address is www.finra.org. An investor brochure that includes information describing the BrokerCheck program may be obtained from FINRA. The FINRA BrokerCheck hotline number is (800) 289-9999. FINRA does not charge a fee for the BrokerCheck program services.


STATEMENT OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

May 1, 2016

SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITYTM

SEPARATE ACCOUNT A

Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity (the “Contract”) is a variable annuity contract offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company (“Pacific Life”).

This Statement of Additional Information (“SAI”) is not a Prospectus and should be read in conjunction with the Contract’s Prospectus, dated May 1, 2016, and any supplement thereto, which is available without charge upon written or telephone request to Pacific Life. Terms used in this SAI have the same meanings as in the Prospectus, and some additional terms are defined particularly for this SAI. This SAI is incorporated by reference into the Contract’s Prospectus.

Pacific Life Insurance Company

Mailing address: P.O. Box 2378

Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

(800) 722-4448 - Contract Owners

(800) 610-4823 – Schwab Financial Consultants


TABLE OF CONTENTS

   

PERFORMANCE

1

Total Returns

1

Yields

2

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

2

Power of Tax Deferral

4

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

4

Pacific Select Distributors, LLC (PSD)

4

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

5

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

5

Corresponding Dates

6

Age and Sex of Annuitant

6

Systematic Transfer Program

6

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

7

More on Federal Tax Issues

7

Safekeeping of Assets

8

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

8

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

8

i


PERFORMANCE

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

Total Returns

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each full year period. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC, and is also referred to as “standardized return.”

Average Annual Total Return

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge and the asset-based Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any non-recurring fees or charges, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider, or any optional Rider charge. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

T = (ERV/P)(365/N) – 1

where T = average annual total return

ERV = ending redeemable value

P = hypothetical initial payment of $1,000

N = number of days

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent 1-, 3-, 5- and 10-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

Aggregate Total Return

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Non-Standardized Total Returns

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider, any optional Rider charge, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

1


Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

Yields

Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Schwab Government Money Market Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return + 1) (To the power of 365/7)] - 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Schwab Government Money Market Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect the deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider, any optional Rider charge, but do reflect a deduction for the Risk Charge and the asset-based Administrative Fee.

Other Subaccounts

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semi-annual compounding:

     

YIELD = 2*[ (

a–b

+ 1)6-1]

c*d

where: a = net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio attributable to the Subaccount.

b = expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).

c = the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during the period that were entitled to receive dividends.

d = the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the period.

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider, any optional Rider charge, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future. Yield should also be considered relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the relative risks associated with the investment policies and objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a basis for comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a stated period of time.

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services,

2


Inc. (“Lipper”), or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and Morningstar rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, Morningstar prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

Tax Deferred Accumulation

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract (Non-Natural Persons as Owners may not receive tax deferred accumulation). Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis.

The chart shows a single Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee, any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any increase in the Risk Charge for an optional death benefit rider, any optional Rider charge, or any underlying Fund expenses.

If above expenses and fees were taken into account, they would reduce the investment return shown for both the taxable investment and the hypothetical variable annuity contract. In addition, these values assume that you do not surrender the Contract or make any withdrawals until the end of the period shown. The chart assumes a full withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in excess of the Purchase Payment.

The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated. Withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not reached age 59½ may be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.

3


Power of Tax Deferral

$10,000 investment at annual rates of return of 0%, 4% and 8%, taxed @ 33%

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, LLC (PSD)

Pacific Select Distributors, LLC, our subsidiary, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of FINRA. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD entered into a selling agreement with Charles Schwab & Co., Inc. (“Schwab”) whose Schwab Financial Consultants are authorized by state insurance departments to solicit applications for the Contracts. The aggregate amount of underwriting commissions paid to PSD for 2015, 2014 and 2013 with regard to this Contract was $509,754, $403,057 and $106,222 respectively, of which $0 was retained.

PSD or an affiliate pays Schwab compensation for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your Schwab Financial Consultant typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to Schwab in connection with the Contract, depending on the arrangement between your Schwab Financial Consultant and Schwab. We are not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your Schwab Financial Consultant how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

PSD Pays Schwab an annual trail commission of 0.20% of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission.

We and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from our own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. This additional compensation also may afford us a “preferred” status at Schwab and provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement, access to Schwab Financial Consultant lists, extra marketing assistance or other heightened visibility and access that otherwise influences the way that Schwab markets the Contracts.

4


We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset Schwab’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Schwab Financial Consultants may also receive non-cash compensation, such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD that are attended by, among others, representatives of PSD, who would receive information and/or training regarding the Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio Managers in addition to information regarding the variable annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a portion of any such conferences or meetings, including directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and trustees of Pacific Select Fund, and spouses/guests of the foregoing. The Pacific Select Fund Board of Trustees may hold meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The Pacific Select Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its Board of Trustees, including the pro rata share of expenses for attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD. Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the Pacific Select Fund Distributor.

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pursuant to Commodity Futures Trading Commission Rule 4.5, Pacific Life has claimed an exclusion from the definition of the term “commodity pool operator” under the Commodity Exchange Act. Therefore, it is not subject to registration or regulation as a commodity pool operator under the Commodity Exchange Act.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z

where (Y) = the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and

(Z) = the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ÷ B) - C

where (A) = the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c

where (a) = the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;

 (b) = the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and

 (c) = any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;

(B) = the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and

(C) = a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period, the basic Risk Charge plus the Administrative Fee and any applicable increase in the Risk Charge (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in the Prospectus).

5


Corresponding Dates

If any transaction or event under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period, the transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the following Business Day. In addition, as stated in the Prospectus, any event scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day will occur on the next succeeding Business Day.

Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on March 1.

Example: If your Annuity Date is July 31, and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be based on valuations made on July 31, August 31, October 1 (for September), October 31, December 1 (for November), December 31, January 31, March 1 (for February), March 31, May 1 (for April), May 31 and July 1 (for June).

Age and Sex of Annuitant

The Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with certain Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and/or sex before or after commencing annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable to equal the amount that the annuitized portion of the Contract Value under that Contract would have purchased for your Annuitant’s correct age and sex. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments based on the incorrect information, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest as stated in your Contract, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest as stated in your Contract, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

Systematic Transfer Program

Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing portfolio rebalancing.

Portfolio Rebalancing

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.

For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in Subaccount C.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually.

You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it In Proper Form. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a date for the first rebalance, it will occur one period after your Contract Date. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time. Portfolio rebalancing will stop on the Annuity Date.

6


Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or living benefit rider, if applicable. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options. If you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

You may choose to have pre-authorized withdrawals occur monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually until you annuitize. Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it In Proper Form. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 59½, may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

More on Federal Tax Issues

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements generally appear in the Fund SAIs. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. On March 7, 2008, the Treasury Department issued Final Regulations under Section 817(h). These Final Regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under case law and IRS guidance, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a particular investment of a Separate Account, a Subaccount (or Variable Investment Option), or a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Separate Accounts and the Subaccounts must be made by us, and all investment decisions concerning the underlying Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, you may not enter into an agreement or arrangement with a portfolio manager of a Portfolio or communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related

7


investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio, and you may not enter into any such agreement or arrangement or have any such communication with us or the investment advisor of a Portfolio.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax advisor with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.

Safekeeping of Assets

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2015 are included in this SAI. The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific Life as of December 31, 2015 and for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in this SAI from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2015. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2015 have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, independent auditors, as stated in their report appearing herein, and is included in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.

The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2015 and for each of the periods presented have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report included in the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2015, which is incorporated by reference in this Registration Statement. Such financial statements and financial statement schedules have been so incorporated in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.

The business address of Deloitte & Touche LLP is 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626.

8


Form No. 16051-16A



 

PACIFIC LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Financial Statements

as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 and

for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

and Independent Auditors’ Report

 

 

PL-1


LOGO

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the “Company”), which comprise the consolidated statements of financial condition as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2015 and the related notes to the consolidated financial statements.

Management’s Responsibility for the Consolidated Financial Statements

Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America; this includes the design, implementation, and maintenance of internal control relevant to the preparation and fair presentation of consolidated financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

Auditors’ Responsibility

Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement.

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the Company’s preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

Opinion

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2015 in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

 

LOGO

March 8, 2016

 

PL-2


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   F I N A N C I A L   C O N D I T I O N

 

         December 31,      
(In Millions)    2015      2014  

ASSETS

     

Investments:

     

Fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value

   $ 38,725       $ 35,662    

Equity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value

     88         131    

Fair value option securities

     536         563    

Mortgage loans (includes VIE assets of $1,800 and $750)

     11,092         9,327    

Policy loans

     7,331         7,234    

Other investments (includes VIE assets of $197 and $118)

     2,024         1,905    

TOTAL INVESTMENTS

     59,796         54,822    

Cash and cash equivalents (includes VIE assets of $7 and $7)

     1,845         3,220    

Restricted cash (includes VIE assets of $117 and $123)

     265         266    

Deferred policy acquisition costs

     4,719         4,742    

Aircraft, net (includes VIE assets of $713 and $869)

     8,307         7,817    

Other assets (includes VIE assets of $32 and $30)

     3,229         2,985    

Separate account assets

     56,974         60,625    

TOTAL ASSETS

   $ 135,135       $ 134,477    

LIABILITIES AND EQUITY

     

Liabilities:

     

Policyholder account balances

   $ 41,359       $ 39,169    

Future policy benefits

     14,088         13,200    

Debt (includes VIE debt of $1,813 and $1,079)

     9,590         8,331    

Other liabilities (includes VIE liabilities of $165 and $201)

     3,438         3,410    

Separate account liabilities

     56,974         60,625    

TOTAL LIABILITIES

     125,449         124,735    

Commitments and contingencies (Note 18)

     

Stockholder’s Equity:

     

Common stock - $50 par value; 600,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding

     30         30    

Paid-in capital

     1,012         982    

Retained earnings

     7,868         7,264    

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     688         1,362    

Total Stockholder’s Equity

     9,598         9,638    

Noncontrolling interests

     88         104    

TOTAL EQUITY

     9,686         9,742    

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY

   $ 135,135       $ 134,477    

The abbreviation VIE above means variable interest entity.

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-3


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   O P E R A T I O N S

 

             Years Ended December 31,          
(In Millions)    2015     2014     2013  

REVENUES

      

Policy fees and insurance premiums

     $4,179        $3,414        $3,365   

Net investment income

     2,557        2,408        2,290   

Net realized investment gain (loss)

     234        (597     586   

OTTI, consisting of $102, $28 and $33 in total, net of $6, $4 and $6 recognized in OCI

     (96     (24     (27

Investment advisory fees

     353        376        351   

Aircraft leasing revenue

     833        796        736   

Other income

     260        259        253   

TOTAL REVENUES

     8,320        6,632        7,554   

BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

      

Policy benefits paid or provided

     3,249        2,650        2,366   

Interest credited to policyholder account balances

     1,250        1,203        1,248   

Commission expenses

     1,200        398        1,354   

Operating and other expenses

     1,870        1,759        1,784   

TOTAL BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

     7,569        6,010        6,752   

INCOME BEFORE PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES

     751        622        802   

Provision for income taxes

     149        102        131   

Net income

     602        520        671   

Less: net (income) loss attributable to noncontrolling interests

     2        3        (19

NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE COMPANY

     $604        $523        $652   

The abbreviation OTTI above means other than temporary impairment losses.

The abbreviation OCI above means other comprehensive income (loss).

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-4


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   C O M P R E H E N S I V E   I N C O M E   ( L O S S )

 

             Years Ended December 31,          
(In Millions)    2015     2014     2013  

NET INCOME

     $602        $520        $671   

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:

      

Gain (loss) on derivatives and unrealized gain (loss) on securities available for sale, net:

      

Unrealized holding gain (loss) arising during period

     (710     525        (754

Reclassification adjustment for (gain) loss included in net income

     41        (16     (42

Gain (loss) on derivatives and unrealized gain (loss) on securities available for sale, net

     (669     509        (796

Other, net

     (5     (5     6   

Other comprehensive income (loss)

     (674     504        (790

Comprehensive income (loss)

     (72     1,024        (119

Less: comprehensive (income) loss attributable to noncontrolling interests

     2        3        (19

COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS) ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE COMPANY

     ($70     $1,027        ($138

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-5


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   E Q U I T Y

 

                      Accumulated Other                    
                      Comprehensive Income (Loss)                    
(In Millions)  

Common

 

Stock

   

Paid-in

 

Capital

   

Retained

 

Earnings

   

Gain (Loss) On

 

Derivatives and

 

Unrealized

 

Gain (Loss) On

 

Securities

 

Available for

 

Sale, Net

   

Other,

 

Net

   

Total

 

Stockholder’s

 

Equity

   

Noncontrolling

 

Interests

   

Total

 

Equity

 

BALANCES, JANUARY 1, 2013

    $30        $982        $6,489        $1,661        ($13     $9,149        $419        $9,568   

Comprehensive income (loss):

               

Net income

        652            652        19        671   

Other comprehensive loss

          (796     6        (790             (790

Total comprehensive income (loss)

              (138     19        (119

Dividend to parent

        (200         (200       (200

Change in equity of noncontrolling interests

                (21     (21

Deconsolidation of VIEs

                                                    (380     (380

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2013

    30        982        6,941        865        (7     8,811        37        8,848   

Comprehensive income (loss):

               

Net income (loss)

        523            523        (3     520   

Other comprehensive income (loss)

          509        (5     504                504   

Total comprehensive income (loss)

              1,027        (3     1,024   

Dividend to parent

        (200         (200       (200

Change in equity of noncontrolling interests

                                                    70        70   

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2014

    30        982        7,264        1,374        (12     9,638        104        9,742   

Comprehensive loss:

               

Net income (loss)

        604            604        (2     602   

Other comprehensive loss

          (669     (5     (674             (674

Total comprehensive loss

              (70     (2     (72

Assumption of noncontrolling interest (Note 7)

      30              30        (30     -     

Change in equity of noncontrolling interests

                                                    16        16   

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2015

    $30        $1,012        $7,868        $705        ($17     $9,598        $88        $9,686   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-6


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   C A S H   F L O W S

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
(In Millions)    2015     2014     2013  

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES

      

Net income

     $602        $520        $671   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

      

Net accretion on fixed maturity securities

     (70     (85     (82

Depreciation and amortization

     466        450        438   

Deferred income taxes

     113        55        118   

Net realized investment (gain) loss

     (234     597        (586

Other than temporary impairments

     96        24        27   

Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs

     290        (622     352   

Interest credited to policyholder account balances

     1,250        1,203        1,248   

Net change in future policy benefits

     1,274        1,789        1,069   

Other operating activities, net

     348        (98     223   

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES

     4,135        3,833        3,478   

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

      

Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:

      

Purchases

     (7,340     (5,638     (5,909

Sales

     552        1,535        1,279   

Maturities and repayments

     2,120        2,410        2,640   

Purchases of fair value option securities

       (498  

Repayments of mortgage loans

     863        917        602   

Fundings of mortgage loans and real estate

     (1,750     (1,243     (1,345

Funding of CMBS VIE mortgage loan

     (1,050     (750  

Proceeds from sale of real estate

     3          405   

Net change in policy loans

     (97     (79     (157

Terminations of derivative instruments, net

     159        9        (35

Proceeds from nonhedging derivative settlements

     135        64        86   

Payments for nonhedging derivative settlements

     (295     (344     (628

Net change in cash collateral received or pledged

     (68     131        (136

Purchases of and advance payments on aircraft

     (1,306     (1,068     (1,143

Proceeds from sale of aircraft

     168        266        380   

Other investing activities, net

     129        323        44   

NET CASH USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES

     (7,777     (3,965     (3,917
(Continued)       

The abbreviation CMBS VIE above means commercial mortgage-backed security VIE.

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-7


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

C O N S O L I D A T E D   S T A T E M E N T S   O F   C A S H   F L O W S

 

             Years Ended December 31,          
(In Millions)    2015     2014     2013  
(Continued)       

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

      

Policyholder account balances:

      

Deposits

     $6,075        $5,900        $6,223   

Withdrawals

     (5,419     (4,957     (5,894

Net change in short-term debt

     227        248        (272

Issuance of long-term debt

     1,041        147        1,661   

Issuance of CMBS VIE debt

     845        676     

Partial retirement of surplus notes

         (478

Payments of long-term debt

     (828     (532     (836

Dividend to parent

       (200     (200

Other financing activities, net

     326        70        (21

NET CASH PROVIDED BY FINANCING ACTIVITIES

     2,267        1,352        183   

Net change in cash and cash equivalents

     (1,375     1,220        (256

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

     3,220        2,000        2,256   

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF YEAR

     $1,845        $3,220        $2,000   

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION

      

Income taxes paid (received), net

     ($99     ($250     $160   

Interest paid

     $376        $324        $294   

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

PL-8


Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

N O T E S   T O   C O N S O L I D A T E D   F I N A N C I A L   S T A T E M E N T S

 

1. ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS

Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) was established in 1868 and is domiciled in the State of Nebraska as a stock life insurance company. Pacific Life is an indirect subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC), a Nebraska mutual holding company, and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, an intermediate Delaware stock holding company. Pacific Life and its subsidiaries and affiliates have primary business operations consisting of life insurance, annuities, mutual funds, aircraft leasing and reinsurance.

BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION

The accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life and its subsidiaries (the Company) have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP) and include the accounts of Pacific Life and its majority owned and controlled subsidiaries and variable interest entities (VIEs) in which the Company is the primary beneficiary. All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated in consolidation.

Pacific Life prepares its regulatory financial statements in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Nebraska Department of Insurance (NE DOI), which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP (Note 2). These consolidated financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory authorities.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Management has identified the following estimates as critical, as they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability:

 

    The fair value of investments in the absence of quoted market values

 

    Other than temporary impairment (OTTI) losses of investments

 

    Application of the consolidation rules to certain investments

 

    The fair value of and accounting for derivatives

 

    Aircraft valuation and impairment

 

    The capitalization and amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC)

 

    The liability for future policyholder benefits

 

    Income taxes

 

    Reinsurance transactions

 

    Litigation and other contingencies

Certain reclassifications have been made to the 2014 and 2013 consolidated financial statements to conform to the 2015 consolidated financial statement presentation.

The Company has evaluated events subsequent to December 31, 2015 through March 8, 2016, the date the consolidated financial statements were available to be issued and has concluded that no events have occurred that require disclosure or adjustment to the consolidated financial statements.

INVESTMENTS

Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of adjustments related to DAC, future policy benefits and deferred income taxes, recognized as a component of other comprehensive income (OCI). Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method. For mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, the determination of effective yield is based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future payments.

 

PL-9


Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are recorded on the ex-dividend date.

The Company’s available for sale securities are assessed for OTTI, if impaired. If a decline in the estimated fair value of an available for sale security is deemed to be other than temporary, the OTTI is recognized equal to the difference between the estimated fair value and net carrying amount of the security. If the OTTI for a fixed maturity security is attributable to both credit and other factors, then the OTTI is bifurcated and the non credit-related portion is recognized in OCI while the credit portion is recognized in earnings. If the OTTI is related to credit factors only or management has determined that it is more likely than not going to be required to sell the security prior to recovery, the OTTI is recognized in earnings.

The evaluation of OTTI is a quantitative and qualitative process subject to significant estimates and management judgment. The Company has controls and procedures in place to monitor securities and identify those that are subject to greater analysis for OTTI. The Company has an investment impairment committee that reviews and evaluates securities for potential OTTI at minimum on a quarterly basis.

In evaluating whether a decline in value is other than temporary, the Company considers many factors including, but not limited to, the following: the extent and duration of the decline in value; the reasons for the decline (credit event, currency, interest rate related, or spread widening); the ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value; and the financial condition of and near-term prospects of the issuer.

Analysis of the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the contractual terms of a fixed maturity security and determination as to whether the Company does not intend to sell the security and that it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the security before recovery of the investment are key factors in determining whether a fixed maturity security is other than temporarily impaired.

For mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, the Company evaluates the performance of the underlying collateral and projected future discounted cash flows. In projecting future discounted cash flows, the Company incorporates inputs from third-party sources and applies reasonable judgment in developing assumptions used to estimate the probability and timing of collecting all contractual cash flows.

In evaluating investment grade perpetual preferred securities, which do not have final contractual cash flows, the Company applies OTTI considerations used for debt securities, placing emphasis on the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the contractual terms of the security and the Company’s intent and ability to hold the security to allow for a recovery of value. Perpetual preferred securities are reported as equity securities as they are structured in equity form, but have significant debt-like characteristics, including periodic dividends, call features, credit ratings and pricing similar to debt securities.

Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss).

The Company has elected the fair value option (FVO) method of accounting for a portfolio of U.S. Government securities. The Company elected the FVO in order to report the investments at estimated fair value with changes in the estimated fair value of these securities recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). This accounting treatment will provide a partial offset to the impact of interest rate movements.

Mortgage loans on real estate are carried at their unpaid principal balance, net of deferred origination fees and write-downs. Interest is recognized and discounts and deferred origination fees are amortized to interest income using the effective interest method based on the contractual life of the mortgage loan. The method of recognizing interest or amortization income is based on the contractual life of the mortgage loan. Mortgage loans are considered to be impaired when management estimates that based upon current information and events, it is probable that the Company will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the mortgage loan agreement. For mortgage loans deemed to be impaired, an impairment loss is recorded when the carrying amount is greater than the Company’s estimated fair value of the underlying collateral of the mortgage loan. When the fair value of the underlying collateral of the mortgage loan is greater than the carrying amount, the mortgage loan is not considered to have an impaired loss and no write-down is recorded.

Policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.

 

PL-10


Other investments primarily consist of investments in partnerships and joint ventures, hedge funds, real estate investments, derivative instruments, non-marketable equity securities, low income housing investments qualifying for tax credits (LIHTC), trading securities, and securities of consolidated investment funds that operate under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (40 Act Funds). Investments in partnerships, joint venture interests and hedge funds are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting, except those held by consolidated sponsored investment funds (Note 4). As a practical expedient, consolidated investment funds estimate the fair value of interests in the portfolio funds using the net asset value per share as determined by the respective investment manager. The changes in estimated fair value for these assets are recognized in net investment income. Non-marketable equity securities are carried at estimated fair value with unrealized gains or losses recognized in OCI. Trading securities and the securities of the 40 Act Funds are reported at estimated fair value with changes in estimated fair value recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

Real estate investments are carried at depreciated cost, net of write-downs. For real estate acquired in satisfaction of debt, cost represents fair value at the date of acquisition. Real estate investments are evaluated for impairment based on the future estimated undiscounted cash flows expected to be received during the estimated holding period. When the future estimated undiscounted cash flows are less than the current carrying amount of the property (gross cost less accumulated depreciation), the property is considered impaired and is written-down to its estimated fair value.

Investments in LIHTC are recorded under the effective interest method since they meet certain requirements, including a projected positive yield based solely on guaranteed credits. The amortization of the original investment and the tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes.

All derivatives, whether designated in a hedging relationship or not, are required to be recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and reclassified to earnings when the hedged item affects earnings, and the ineffective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). If the derivative is designated as a fair value hedge, changes in the estimated fair value of the hedging derivative, including amounts measured as ineffectiveness, and changes in the estimated fair value of the hedged item related to the designated risk being hedged, are reported in net realized investment gain (loss). The change in estimated value of the hedged item associated with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item. For derivative instruments not designated as a hedge, the change in estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss).

The periodic cash flows for all derivatives designated as a hedge are recorded consistent with the hedged item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances or interest expense, which is included in operating and other expenses. For derivatives not designated as a hedge, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the accumulated amount in OCI is reclassified into earnings into either net investment income, net realized investment gain (loss), interest credited to policyholder account balances, or operating and other expenses when the forecasted transactions affect earnings. Upon termination of a fair value hedging relationship, the accumulated adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item is amortized into either net investment income, interest credited to policyholder account balances, or operating and other expenses over its remaining life.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with a maturity of three months or less from purchase date. Cash equivalents consist primarily of U.S. Treasury bills and money market securities.

RESTRICTED CASH

Restricted cash primarily consists of liquidity reserves related to VIEs, security deposits, commitment fees, cash collateral, cash held in trusts, maintenance reserve payments and rental payments received from certain lessees related to the aircraft leasing business.

DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS

The direct and incremental costs associated with the successful acquisition of new or renewal insurance business; principally commissions, medical examinations, underwriting, policy issue and other expenses; are deferred and recorded as an asset referred to as DAC. DAC related to internally replaced contracts is immediately written off to expense and any new deferrable expenses associated with the replacement are deferred if the contract modification substantially changes the contract. However, if the contract modification does not substantially change the contract, the existing DAC asset remains in place and any acquisition costs associated with the modification are immediately expensed. The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC.

 

PL-11


For universal life (UL), variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition costs are generally amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins, and surrender charges over the estimated lives of the contracts. Actual gross margins or profits may vary from management’s estimates, which can increase or decrease the rate of DAC amortization. DAC related to traditional policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is adjusted with corresponding charges or benefits, respectively, directly to equity through OCI.

During reporting periods of negative actual gross profits, DAC amortization may be negative, which would result in an increase to the DAC balance. Negative amortization is only recorded when the increased DAC balance is determined to be recoverable and is also limited to amounts originally deferred plus interest.

Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and lapse rates, rider utilization, expenses, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges from 6.75% to 7.75% depending on the product. A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs results in a change to amounts expensed in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at least annually and necessary revisions are made to certain assumptions to the extent that actual or anticipated experience necessitates such a prospective change. The Company may also identify and implement actuarial modeling refinements to projection models that may result in increases or decreases to the DAC asset.

The DAC asset is reviewed at least annually to ensure that the unamortized balance does not exceed expected recoverable EGPs.

AIRCRAFT, NET

The Company records aircraft and other aircraft components at cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost consists of the acquisition price, including interest capitalized during the construction period of a new aircraft, and major additions and modifications. Depreciation to estimated residual values is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful life of the aircraft. Major improvements to aircraft are capitalized as incurred and depreciated over the shorter of the remaining useful life of the aircraft or the useful life of the improvement. The Company evaluates carrying amount of aircraft quarterly or based upon changes in market and other physical and economic conditions that indicate the carrying amount of the aircraft may not be recoverable. The Company will record impairments to recognize a loss in the value of the aircraft when management believes that, based on future estimated undiscounted cash flows, the recoverability has been impaired.

GOODWILL

Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition costs over the fair value of net assets acquired. Goodwill is not amortized but is reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events occur or circumstances indicate that the goodwill might be impaired. Goodwill is included in other assets and decreased to $63 million as of December 31, 2015 from $101 million as of December 31, 2014 due to the sale of the Pacific Global Advisors LLC pension advisory business during 2015. There were no goodwill impairments recognized during the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013.

POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES

Policyholder account balances on UL and certain investment-type contracts, such as funding agreements and guaranteed interest contracts (GICs), are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and assessments. Other investment-type contracts such as payout annuities without life contingencies are valued using a prospective method that estimates the present value of future contract cash flows at the assumed credited or contract rate. Interest credited to these contracts ranged from 0.2% to 9.1%.

 

PL-12


FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS

Annuity reserves, which primarily consist of group retirement, structured settlement and immediate annuities with life contingencies, are equal to the present value of estimated future payments using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement age and expenses. Interest rates used in establishing such liabilities ranged from 0.9% to 11.0%.

The Company offers annuity contracts with guaranteed minimum benefits, including guaranteed minimum death benefits (GMDBs) and riders with guaranteed living benefits (GLBs) that guarantee net principal over a ten year holding period or a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain restrictions. If the guarantee includes a benefit that is only attainable upon annuitization or is wholly life contingent (e.g., GMDBs or guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits for life), it is accounted for as an insurance liability (Note 10). All other GLB guarantees are accounted for as embedded derivatives (Note 8).

Policy charges assessed against policyholders that represent compensation to the Company for services to be provided in future periods, or for consideration for origination of the contract, are deferred as an unearned revenue reserves (URR), and recognized in revenue over the expected life of the contract using the same methods and assumptions used to amortize DAC. Unearned revenue related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded to equity through OCI.

Life insurance reserves are composed of benefit reserves and additional liabilities. Benefit reserves are valued using the net level premium method on the basis of actuarial assumptions appropriate at policy issue. Mortality and persistency assumptions are generally based on the Company’s experience, which, together with interest and expense assumptions, include a margin for possible unfavorable deviations. Interest rate assumptions ranged from 3.0% to 9.3%. Future dividends for participating business are provided for in the liability for future policy benefits. Additional liabilities are held for certain insurance benefit features that have amounts assessed in a manner that is expected to result in profits in earlier years and subsequent losses. The additional liability is valued using a range of scenarios, rather than a single set of best estimate assumptions, which are consistent with assumptions used in estimated gross profits for purposes of amortizing capitalized acquisition costs.

As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, participating experience rated policies paying dividends represent less than 1% of direct life insurance in force.

Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. The Company may also identify and implement actuarial modeling refinements to projection models that may result in increases and decreases to the liability for future policy benefits. Such changes in estimates are included in earnings for the period in which such changes occur.

REINSURANCE

The Company has ceded reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies to limit potential losses, reduce exposure arising from larger risks, provide additional capacity for future growth and also assumes reinsurance agreements. As part of a strategic alliance, the Company also reinsures risks associated with policies written by an independent producer group through modified coinsurance and yearly renewable term (YRT) arrangements with this producer group’s reinsurance company. The ceding of risk does not discharge the Company from its primary obligations to contract owners. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations under reinsurance contracts, the Company remains contingently liable. Each reinsurer is reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each reinsurance contract and throughout the period that the reinsurance contract is in place.

All assets associated with business reinsured on a modified coinsurance basis remain with, and under the control of, the Company. As part of its risk management process, the Company routinely evaluates its reinsurance programs and may change retention limits, reinsurers or other features at any time.

Reinsurance accounting is utilized for ceded and assumed transactions when risk transfer provisions have been met. To meet risk transfer requirements, a reinsurance contract must include insurance risk, consisting of both underwriting and timing risk, and a reasonable possibility of a significant loss to the reinsurer.

Reinsurance premiums ceded and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are deducted from their respective revenue and benefit and expense accounts. Prepaid reinsurance premiums, included in other assets, are premiums that are paid in advance for future coverage. Amounts receivable and payable to reinsurers are offset for account settlement purposes for contracts where the right of offset exists, with net reinsurance receivables included in other assets and net reinsurance payables included in other liabilities. Reinsurance receivables and payables may include balances due from reinsurance companies for paid and unpaid losses.

 

PL-13


REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

Premiums from annuity contracts with life contingencies and traditional life and term insurance contracts are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are provided against such revenues to recognize profits over the estimated lives of the contracts by providing for liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses for contract administration and DAC amortization.

Receipts for UL and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder account balances or separate account liabilities and are not included in revenue. Policy fees consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and assessed against related account values during the period and also include the amortization of URR. The timing of policy fee revenue recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Benefits and expenses include policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.

Investment advisory fees are primarily fees earned by Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, which serves as the investment advisor for the Pacific Select Fund, an investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable universal life (VUL) and variable annuity contract holders, and the Pacific Funds Series Trust (formerly known as Pacific Life Funds), the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund products and other funds. These fees are based upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios and are recorded as earned. Related subadvisory expense is included in operating and other expenses.

Aircraft leases are generally accounted for as operating leases and are structured as triple net leases whereby the lessee is responsible for maintaining the aircraft and paying operational, maintenance and insurance expenses. The aircraft leases require payment in U.S. dollars. Aircraft leasing revenue is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease agreements. The Company has capital leases in the amount of $100 million and $50 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, which are included in other assets.

DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION

Aircraft and certain other assets are depreciated or amortized using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from three to 40 years. Depreciation and amortization of aircraft and certain other assets are included in operating and other expenses. Depreciation of investment real estate is computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from five to 30 years, and is included in net investment income.

INCOME TAXES

Pacific Life and its includable subsidiaries are included in the consolidated Federal income tax return and the combined California franchise tax return of PMHC and are allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of including their operations in these returns under a tax sharing agreement. Certain of the Company’s non-insurance subsidiaries also file separate state tax returns, if necessary. Generally, a life insurance company cannot be treated as an includable corporation in a consolidated return with nonlife companies unless it has been a member of the affiliated group for five taxable years. For this reason, the Company’s life insurance companies meeting this criterion file separate Federal income tax returns. Some of the Company’s non-U.S. subsidiaries are subject to tax in Singapore and other jurisdictions. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are expected to be recovered or settled.

CONTINGENCIES

The Company evaluates all identified contingent matters on an individual basis. A loss is recorded if probable and reasonably estimable. The Company establishes reserves for these contingencies at the best estimate, or, if no one amount within the range of possible losses is more probable than any other, the Company records an estimated reserve at the low end of the range of losses. The Company does not record gain contingencies.

SEPARATE ACCOUNTS

Separate accounts primarily include variable annuity and variable life contracts, as well as other guaranteed and non-guaranteed accounts. Separate account assets are recorded at estimated fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. A

 

PL-14


separate account liability is recorded equal to the amount of separate account assets. Deposits to separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not reflected in the consolidated statements of operations or cash flows. Amounts charged to the separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as policy fees.

ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

The estimated fair value of financial instruments has been determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data used to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a material effect on the estimated fair value amounts.

RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

In May 2015, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2015-07, which modifies the Accounting Standards Codification’s (Codification) Fair Value Measurement Topic. This ASU requires a reporting entity to exclude any investments for which fair value is measured using net asset value (NAV) as a practical expedient from the fair value hierarchy disclosures. In 2015, the Company early adopted this ASU and applied it retrospectively. This guidance only impacted financial statement disclosures (Note 12) and had no impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02, which modifies the Codification’s Comprehensive Income Topic. This ASU requires enhanced reporting of amounts reclassified out of accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI) either on the face of the consolidated financial statements or in the notes to the consolidated financial statements. Nonpublic entities are required to report the effects of reclassifications on net income for annual reporting periods and to report information about the amounts reclassified out of AOCI by component for each reporting period for interim and annual reporting periods. The Company adopted this ASU in 2014 and has included the required annual disclosure in Note 13.

FUTURE ADOPTION OF ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

In April 2015, the FASB issued ASU 2015-03, which requires debt issuance costs to be presented in the statement of financial condition as a direct deduction from the associated debt liability. The guidance in the new standard is limited to the presentation of debt issuance costs and does not affect the recognition and measurement of debt issuance costs. The Company will adopt this ASU retrospectively on January 1, 2016 and adoption will result in a change in presentation of these costs on the consolidated statements of financial condition. Adoption in 2016 will result in a decrease to other assets and debt of $84 million for December 31, 2015.

In February 2015, the FASB issued ASU 2015-02, which changes the analysis that a reporting entity must perform to determine whether it should consolidate certain legal entities. All legal entities with which the Company is involved are subject to reevaluation under the revised consolidation model. The amendments modify the evaluation of whether limited partnerships and similar legal entities are VIEs or voting interest entities, eliminate the presumption that a general partner should consolidate a limited partnership, and affect the consolidation analysis of reporting entities that are involved with VIEs, particularly those that have fee arrangements and related party relationships. The Company will adopt this ASU retrospectively on January 1, 2016. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of this guidance on its consolidated financial statements.

In May 2014, the FASB issued ASU 2014-09, which clarifies the principles for recognizing revenue when it transfers promised goods and services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration to which an entity expects to be entitled to in exchange for those goods and services. This ASU defines a five step process that identifies the various components of the revenue recognition process, identifying the performance obligation and when to recognize revenue when that performance obligation has been met. The Company will adopt this ASU retrospectively for the year ended December 31, 2018. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of this guidance on its consolidated financial statements.

 

PL-15


2. STATUTORY FINANCIAL INFORMATION AND DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS

STATUTORY ACCOUNTING PRACTICES

Pacific Life prepares its regulatory financial statements in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the NE DOI, which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. Statutory accounting practices primarily differ from U.S. GAAP by charging policy acquisition costs to expense as incurred, recognizing certain policy fees as revenue when billed, establishing future policy benefit liabilities using different actuarial assumptions, reporting surplus notes as surplus instead of debt, as well as the valuation of investments and certain assets and accounting for deferred income taxes on a different basis.

The NE DOI has a prescribed accounting practice for certain synthetic GIC reserves that differs from National Association of Insurance Commissioners (NAIC) Accounting Practices and Procedures Manual (NAIC SAP). The NE DOI reserve method is based on an annual accumulation of 30% of the contract fees on synthetic GICs and is subject to a maximum of 150% of the annualized contract fees. This reserve amounted to $62 million and $61 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, and has been recorded by Pacific Life. The NAIC SAP basis for this reserve equals the excess, if any, of the value of guaranteed contract liabilities over the market value of the assets in the segregated portfolio less deductions based on asset valuation reserve factors. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the reserve for synthetic GICs using the NAIC SAP basis was zero.

STATUTORY NET INCOME AND SURPLUS

Statutory net income of Pacific Life was $520 million, $635 million and $521 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Statutory capital and surplus of Pacific Life was $7,762 million and $7,172 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

AFFILIATED REINSURANCE

Pacific Life cedes certain statutory reserves to affiliated special purpose financial insurance companies and affiliated captive reinsurance companies that are supported by a combination of cash, invested and other assets and third-party letters of credit or note facilities. As of December 31, 2015, Pacific Life’s total statutory reserve credit was $1,901 million, of which $1,249 million was supported by third-party letters of credit and note facilities. As of December 31, 2014, Pacific Life’s total statutory reserve credit was $1,702 million, of which $1,160 million was supported by third-party letters of credit and note facilities, as described below.

Pacific Life utilizes affiliated reinsurers to mitigate the statutory capital impact of NAIC Model Regulation “Valuation of Life Insurance Policies” (Regulation XXX) and NAIC Actuarial Guideline 38 on the Company’s UL products with flexible duration no lapse guarantee rider (FDNLGR) benefits. Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Company of Vermont (PAR Vermont) and Pacific Baleine Reinsurance Company (PBRC) are Vermont based special purpose financial insurance companies subject to regulatory supervision by the Vermont Department of Financial Regulation (Vermont Department). PAR Vermont and PBRC are wholly owned subsidiaries of Pacific Life and accredited authorized reinsurers in Nebraska. Pacific Life cedes certain level term life insurance to PBRC and FDNLGR benefits to PAR Vermont and PBRC. Reinsurance ceded to PAR Vermont is net of the reinsurance ceded under an excess of loss reinsurance agreement with a commercial reinsurer. Economic reserves, as defined in the PAR Vermont and PBRC reinsurance agreements, are supported by cash and invested and other assets, including funds withheld at Pacific Life.

Reserves in excess of the economic reserves held at PAR Vermont are supported by a letter of credit agreement provided by a highly rated bank, which has a maximum commitment amount of $843 million and a 20 year term expiring October 2031. The letter of credit agreement is non-recourse to Pacific LifeCorp or any of its affiliates, other than PAR Vermont. The letter of credit has been approved as an admissible asset by the Vermont Department for PAR Vermont statutory accounting. As of December 31, 2015, the letter of credit amounted to $680 million and was held in a trust with Pacific Life as beneficiary. PAR Vermont admitted $677 million and $619 million as an asset in its statutory financial statements as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

Reserves in excess of the economic reserves held at PBRC are supported by a note facility with a maximum commitment amount of $400 million. This facility is non-recourse to Pacific Life or any of its affiliates, other than PBRC. Through this facility, PBRC issued a surplus note with a maturity date of December 2043 and received a note receivable in return with a maturity date of December 2038. The note receivable is credit enhanced by a highly rated third-party reinsurer for 20 years with a five year extension. The note receivable has been approved as an admissible asset by the Vermont Department for PBRC statutory accounting. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the note receivable amounted to $159 million and $111 million, respectively, and was held in a trust with Pacific Life as beneficiary. PBRC admitted $159 million and $111 million as an asset in its statutory financial statements as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

PL-16


Pacific Life has reinsurance agreements with Pacific Life Reinsurance (Barbados) Ltd. (PLRB), an exempt life reinsurance company domiciled in Barbados and wholly owned by Pacific LifeCorp. The underlying reinsurance is comprised of coinsurance and YRT treaties. Pacific Life retroceded the majority of the underlying YRT U.S. treaties on a 100% coinsurance with funds withheld basis to PLRB (PLRB Agreement). The PLRB Agreement is accounted for under deposit accounting for U.S. GAAP and as reinsurance under statutory accounting principles. The statutory accounting reserve credit is supported by cash, funds withheld at Pacific Life and a $413 million letter of credit issued to PLRB by highly rated third-party banks for the benefit of Pacific Life, which expires August 26, 2016. In connection with the acquisition and reinsurance arrangements between Pacific Life and PLRB, Pacific LifeCorp entered into a capital maintenance agreement and has also agreed to honor PLRB’s obligations to the letter of credit provider in the event of default.

Pacific Annuity Reinsurance Company (PARC) is a captive reinsurance company subject to regulatory supervision by the Arizona Department of Insurance. PARC was formed to reinsure benefits provided by variable annuity contracts and contract rider guarantees issued by Pacific Life. Base annuity contracts are reinsured on a modified coinsurance basis and the contract guarantees are reinsured on a coinsurance with funds withheld basis. On December 1, 2012, the effective date of the reinsurance agreement, Pacific Life ceded 5% of its inforce variable annuity business to PARC, after third-party reinsurance, and ceded 5% of new business issued thereafter. PARC is a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp.

RISK-BASED CAPITAL

Risk-based capital is a method developed by the NAIC to measure the minimum amount of capital appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. Additionally, certain risks are required to be measured using actuarial cash flow modeling techniques, subject to formulaic minimums. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by a comparison to the risk-based capital results. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, Pacific Life, Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A), an Arizona domiciled life insurance company wholly owned by Pacific Life, PAR Vermont, and PBRC all exceeded the minimum risk-based capital requirements.

DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS

The payment of dividends by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp is subject to restrictions set forth in the State of Nebraska insurance laws. These laws require (i) notification to the NE DOI for the declaration and payment of any dividend and (ii) approval by the NE DOI for accumulated dividends within the preceding twelve months that exceed the greater of 10% of statutory policyholder surplus as of the preceding December 31 or statutory net gain from operations for the preceding twelve months ended December 31. Generally, these restrictions pose no short-term liquidity concerns for Pacific LifeCorp. Based on these restrictions and 2015 statutory results, Pacific Life could pay $608 million in dividends in 2016 to Pacific LifeCorp without prior approval from the NE DOI, subject to the notification requirement. Pacific Life did not pay any dividends to Pacific LifeCorp during the year ended December 31, 2015. During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, Pacific Life paid dividends to Pacific LifeCorp of $200 million each year.

The payment of dividends by PL&A to Pacific Life is subject to restrictions set forth in the State of Arizona insurance laws. These laws require (i) notification to the Arizona Department of Insurance (AZ DOI) for the declaration and payment of any dividend and (ii) approval by the AZ DOI for accumulated dividends within the preceding twelve months that exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders as of the preceding December 31 or statutory net gain from operations for the preceding twelve months ended December 31. Based on this limitation and 2015 statutory results, PL&A could pay $39 million in dividends to Pacific Life in 2016 without prior regulatory approval. During the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, PL&A paid dividends to Pacific Life of $37 million, $35 million and $35 million, respectively.

 

PL-17


3. CLOSED BLOCK

In connection with the Company’s conversion to a mutual holding company structure, an arrangement known as a closed block (the Closed Block) was created for the exclusive benefit of certain individual life insurance policies that had an experience based dividend scale in 1997. The Closed Block was designed to give reasonable assurance to holders of the Closed Block policies that policy dividends would not change.

Assets that support the Closed Block, which are primarily included in fixed maturity securities and policy loans, amounted to $260 million and $265 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Liabilities allocated to the Closed Block, which are primarily included in future policy benefits, amounted to $268 million and $269 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The net contribution to income from the Closed Block was zero, $3 million and zero for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

4. VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES

The Company evaluates its interests in VIEs on an ongoing basis and consolidates those VIEs in which it has a controlling financial interest and is thus deemed to be the primary beneficiary. A controlling financial interest has both of the following characteristics: (i) the power to direct the activities of the VIE that most significantly impact the VIE’s economic performance, and (ii) the obligation to absorb losses of the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE or the right to receive benefits from the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE. Creditors or beneficial interest holders of VIEs, where the Company is the primary beneficiary, have no recourse against the Company in the event of default by these VIEs.

The following table presents, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the consolidated assets and consolidated liabilities, which the Company has consolidated because it is the primary beneficiary:

 

     Consolidated VIEs  
     Consolidated      Consolidated  
     Assets      Liabilities  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2015:

     

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     $1,805         $1,525   

Sponsored investment funds

     204         10   

Aircraft securitization

     857         443   
  

 

 

 

Total

     $2,866         $1,978   
  

 

 

 

December 31, 2014:

     

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     $750         $676   

Sponsored investment funds

     125         2   

Aircraft securitization

     1,022         602   
  

 

 

 

Total

             $1,897         $1,280   
  

 

 

 

COMMERCIAL MORTGAGE-BACKED SECURITIES

Pacific Life has purchased significant interests in multiple commercial mortgage-backed security trusts secured by commercial real estate properties (CMBS VIE). The trusts are classified as VIEs as they have no total equity investment at risk and while no future equity infusions should be required to permit the entities to continue their activities, accounting guidance requires trusts with no equity at risk to be classified as VIEs. The Company has determined that it is the primary beneficiary of the VIEs due to the significant control over the collateral the Company has in the event of a default and has consolidated the VIEs into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Non-recourse debt consolidated by the Company was $1,521 million and $676 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively (included in CMBS VIE debt in Note 11).

SPONSORED INVESTMENT FUNDS

The Company has leveraged internal expertise to bring investment strategies/products to sophisticated institutional investors and qualified institutional buyers. Structured as limited partnerships, the Company has provided the initial cash and noncash investments to provide seed capital for these products for the purpose of refining the investment strategies and developing a performance history. Based on the design and operation of the limited partnership arrangements, the Company concluded that

 

PL-18


these legal entities are subject to consolidation under the variable interest rules and that the Company is the primary beneficiary. It is anticipated that the Company will continue to maintain a controlling interest in some, but not all, of the limited partnerships. The Company reevaluates its standing as the primary beneficiary on a quarterly basis or upon the occurrence of specified events. Short-term non-recourse debt consolidated by the Company was $10 million and $2 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively (included in other VIE debt in Note 11). The line of credit has a $15 million borrowing capacity. The Company’s unfunded commitment to the limited partnerships was $75 million and $119 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

AIRCRAFT SECURITIZATION

During 2005, Aviation Capital Group Corp., a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life engaged in the acquisition and leasing of commercial aircraft (ACG), sponsored a financial asset securitization secured by aircraft. The transaction was classified as a VIE as the total equity investment at risk was insufficient to finance its activities without additional subordinated support. ACG receives ongoing compensation for its role as the remarketing and administrative agent and for various aircraft-related services.

ACG is the primary beneficiary of the securitization because it owns 100% of the equity and has a controlling financial interest in this VIE. As such, the securitization is included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Non-recourse debt consolidated by the Company was $282 million and $401 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively (included in ACG VIE debt in Note 11).

The following table presents the carrying amount and classification of the assets, relating to VIEs in which the Company holds a variable interest but does not consolidate because it is not the primary beneficiary. The Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these VIEs because it does not have the power to direct their most significant financial activities. Also presented is the maximum exposure to loss which includes the carrying amount and any unfunded commitments assuming the commitments are fully funded.

 

     Non-consolidated VIEs  
            Maximum  
    

Carrying

 

Amount

    

Exposure to

 

Loss

 
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2015:

     

Fixed maturity securities

     $56         $56   

Mortgage loans

     60         104   

Other investments

     847         1,316   
  

 

 

 

Total

     $963         $1,476   
  

 

 

 

December 31, 2014:

     

Fixed maturity securities

     $54         $54   

Other investments

     828         1,254   
  

 

 

 

Total

             $882         $1,308   
  

 

 

 

FIXED MATURITY SECURITIES

The Company purchased primarily investment grade beneficial interests issued from bankruptcy-remote special purpose entities, which are collateralized by financial assets including corporate debt.

MORTGAGE LOANS

Included in mortgage loans is a non-recourse construction loan to a non-consolidated VIE.

OTHER INVESTMENTS

The limited partnership investments include private equity funds and equity in real estate which are reported in other investments. For these investments, the Company determined it is not the primary beneficiary due to the relative size of the Company’s equity investments in comparison to the original amount issued by the VIEs.

 

PL-19


OTHER NON-CONSOLIDATED VIEs NOT INCLUDED IN THE TABLE ABOVE

As part of normal investment activities, the Company will make passive investments in structured securities for which it is not the sponsor. The structured security investments include residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), collateralized debt obligations, and other asset-backed securities which are reported in fixed maturities securities available for sale. The Company’s maximum exposure to loss for these investments is limited to its carrying amount. See Note 6 for the net carrying amount and estimated fair value of the structured security investments.

 

5. DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS

Components of DAC are as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Balance, January 1

         $4,742         $4,214         $4,329   
  

 

 

 

Additions:

        

Capitalized during the year

     544         608         621   
  

 

 

 

Amortization:

        

Allocated to commission expenses

     (806      15         (955

Allocated to operating expenses

     (28      (1      (18
  

 

 

 

Total amortization

     (834      14         (973

Allocated to OCI

     267         (94      237   
  

 

 

 

Balance, December 31

     $4,719         $4,742         $4,214   
  

 

 

 

During the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, the Company revised certain assumptions utilized to develop EGPs for its products subject to DAC amortization. This resulted in an increase in DAC amortization expense of $51 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 and decreases in DAC amortization expense of $39 million and $43 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The revised EGPs also resulted in increased URR amortization of $27 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 and decreased URR amortization of $128 million and $6 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

Components of the capitalized sales inducement balance included in the DAC asset are as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Balance, January 1

     $667         $597         $638   

Deferred costs capitalized during the year

     17         29         38   

Amortization of deferred costs

     (101      41         (79
  

 

 

 

Balance, December 31

     $583         $667         $597   
  

 

 

 

 

PL-20


6. INVESTMENTS

The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount of fixed maturity securities available for sale represents amortized cost adjusted for OTTI recognized in earnings and terminated fair value hedges. The net carrying amount of equity securities available for sale represents cost adjusted for OTTI. See Note 12 for information on the Company’s estimated fair value measurements and disclosure.

 

    

Net

 

Carrying

 

Amount

                      
        Gross Unrealized     

Estimated 

 

Fair Value 

 
        Gains      Losses     
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2015:

           

U.S. Government

     $49         $8            $57     

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     815         125         $2         938     

Foreign governments

     546         52         6         592     

Corporate securities

     31,727         1,630         691         32,666     

RMBS

     2,490         115         49         2,556     

CMBS

     796         24         7         813     

Collateralized debt obligations

     55         10            65     

Other asset-backed securities

     993         57         12         1,038     
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

         $37,471         $2,021         $767         $38,725     
  

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

     $84         $6         $4         $86     

Other equity securities

     1         1            2     
  

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     $85         $7         $4         $88     
  

 

 

 
    

Net

 

Carrying

 

Amount

                      
        Gross Unrealized     

Estimated 

 

Fair Value 

 
        Gains      Losses     
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2014:

           

U.S. Government

     $47         $9            $56     

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     853         164            1,017     

Foreign governments

     591         70         $2         659     

Corporate securities

     27,275         2,592         148         29,719     

RMBS

     2,597         150         43         2,704     

CMBS

     626         32         1         657     

Collateralized debt obligations

     54         16            70     

Other asset-backed securities

     717         64         1         780     
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     $32,760         $3,097         $195         $35,662     
  

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

     $127         $7         $9         $125     

Other equity securities

     1         5            6     
  

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     $128         $12         $9         $131     
  

 

 

 

 

PL-21


The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for sale as of December 31, 2015, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities as borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.

 

    

Net

 

Carrying

 

Amount

                      
        Gross Unrealized     

Estimated

 

Fair Value

 
        Gains      Losses     
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Due in one year or less

     $1,416         $25         $5         $1,436   

Due after one year through five years

     6,555         446         71         6,930   

Due after five years through ten years

     14,485         389         385         14,489   

Due after ten years

     10,681         955         238         11,398   
  

 

 

 
     33,137         1,815         699         34,253   

Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities

     4,334         206         68         4,472   
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     $37,471         $2,021         $767         $38,725   
  

 

 

 

 

PL-22


The following tables present the number of investments, estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses on investments where the estimated fair value has declined and remained continuously below the net carrying amount for less than twelve months and for twelve months or greater. Included in the tables are gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity securities available for sale and other investments, which include equity securities available for sale and cost method investments.

 

     Total       
       Number       

  Estimated  

 

  Fair Value  

    

Gross

 

Unrealized  

 

Losses

    
  

 

 

    

 

 

    
       

 

(In Millions)

 

  

 

  

December 31, 2015:

           

 

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     3           $134         $2        

 

Foreign governments

     10           62         6        

 

Corporate securities

     989           10,785         691        

 

RMBS

     101           972         49        

 

CMBS

     17           273         7        

 

Other asset-backed securities

     60           533         12        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total fixed maturity securities

     1,180           12,759         767        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

Perpetual preferred securities

     4           18         4        

 

Other investments

     4           18         5        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total other investments

     8           36         9        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total

     1,188           $12,795         $776        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
      Number      

Estimated

 

  Fair Value

   

Gross

 

Unrealized  

 

Losses

      Number    

  Estimated

 

  Fair Value

   

Gross

 

  Unrealized  

 

Losses

 
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    (In Millions)     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2015:

           

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

    3          $134        $2           

Foreign governments

    7          43        5          3          $19        $1     

Corporate securities

    831          9,473        413          158          1,312        278     

RMBS

    31          467        5          70          505        44     

CMBS

    17          273        7           

Other asset-backed securities

    57          527        10          3          6        2     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    946          10,917        442          234          1,842        325     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

    2          9        1          2          9        3     

Other investments

    4          18        5           
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total other investments

    6          27        6          2          9        3     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    952          $10,944        $448          236          $1,851        $328     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

PL-23


     Total       
       Number       

Estimated

 

Fair Value

    

Gross

 

Unrealized

 

Losses

    
  

 

 

    

 

 

    
       

 

(In Millions)

 

  

 

  

December 31, 2014:

           

 

Foreign governments

     3           $18         $2        

 

Corporate securities

     412           3,493         148        

 

RMBS

     80           630         43        

 

CMBS

     10           91         1        

 

Other asset-backed securities

     12           60         1        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total fixed maturity securities

     517           4,292         195        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

Perpetual preferred securities

     4           36         9        

 

Other investments

     2           14         1        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total other investments

     6           50         10        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total

     523           $4,342         $205        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

    Less than 12 Months     12 Months or Greater  
      Number      

Estimated

 

  Fair Value  

   

Gross

 

Unrealized

 

Losses

      Number      

Estimated

 

  Fair Value  

   

Gross

 

Unrealized  

 

Losses

 
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
          (In Millions)     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2014:

           

Foreign governments

          3          $18        $2     

Corporate securities

    229          $1,512        $55          183          1,981        93     

RMBS

    26          193        3          54          437        40     

CMBS

          10          91        1     

Other asset-backed securities

          12          60        1     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    255          1,705        58          262          2,587        137     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

          4          36        9     

Other investments

    2          14        1           
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total other investments

    2          14        1          4          36        9     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    257          $1,719        $59          266          $2,623        $146     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The gross unrealized losses on available for sale securities and other investments in the tables above increased from $205 million as of December 31, 2014 to $776 million as of December 31, 2015. This increase is primarily due to increases in interest rates, general credit spread widening, and declines in the energy, metals and mining sectors, as a result of declining oil, natural gas, and commodity prices. Included in corporate securities above is a portion of the Company’s net exposure to fixed maturity securities in the energy, metals and mining sectors, which was $3.3 billion as of December 31, 2015, with a net unrealized loss of $247 million. As of December 31, 2015, 90% of investments in these sectors were investment grade.

The Company has evaluated fixed maturity securities available for sale and other investments with gross unrealized losses and has determined that the unrealized losses are temporary. The Company does not intend to sell the investments and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the investments before recovery of their net carrying amounts.

 

PL-24


The table below presents non-agency RMBS and CMBS by investment rating from independent rating agencies and vintage year of the underlying collateral as of December 31, 2015.

 

   

Net

Carrying

Amount

          Rating as % of     Vintage Breakdown  
Rating    

Estimated

Fair Value

   

Net Carrying

Amount

   

  2004 and  

Prior

    2005     2006     2007    

2008 and 

Thereafter 

 

 

   

 

 

 
    ($ In Millions)               

Prime RMBS:

               

AAA

    $378        $376        26%                 26%    

AA

    30        30        2%         2%           

A

    14        15        1%         1%           

BAA

    101        106        7%         5%        2%         

BA and below

    910        921        64%         12%        29%        19%        4%     
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

        $1,433            $1,448        100%         20%        31%        19%        4%        26%    
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Alt-A RMBS:

               

AAA

    $1        $1        0%              

AA

    26        27        7%         7%           

A

    12        13        3%         1%        2%         

BAA

    27        28        7%         4%        3%         

BA and below

    308        285        83%         14%        16%        23%        30%     
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $374        $354        100%         26%        21%        23%        30%        0%    
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Sub-prime RMBS:

               

AAA

    $14        $13        7%         7%           

BAA

    55        55        29%         29%           

BA and below

    119        118        64%         55%        7%        1%        1%     
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $188        $186        100%         91%        7%        1%        1%        0%    
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

CMBS:

               

AAA

    $63        $67        8%                 8%    

AA

    162        174        20%         7%              13%    

A

    388        390        49%                 49%   

BAA

    147        146        18%                 18%    

BA and below

    36        36        5%                 5%    
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $796        $813        100%         7%        0%        0%        0%        93%    
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Prime mortgages are loans made to borrowers with strong credit histories, whereas sub-prime mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to borrowers with weak credit profiles. Alt-A mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to customers who have good credit ratings, but have limited documentation for their source of income or some other standard input used to underwrite the mortgage loan. The greater use of affordable mortgage products and relaxed underwriting standards by some originators for these loans has led to higher delinquency and loss rates, especially within the 2007 and 2006 vintage years.

 

PL-25


During 2015, the Company initiated a securities lending program whereby the Company lends fixed maturity securities to financial institutions in short-term arrangements. The Company requires cash collateral equal to 102% of the estimated fair value of the loaned securities. All securities lending agreements are callable by the Company at any time. The contractual maturity on all securities lending arrangements is overnight and continuous. The following table presents the Company’s security loans outstanding and the corresponding collateral held:

 

     December 31,  
     2015  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Security loans outstanding, estimated fair value (1)

     $157     

Reinvestment portfolio, estimated fair value (2)

     161     

Cash collateral liability (3)

     161     

 

  (1)  Included within fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value and comprised of corporate securities.
  (2)  The reinvestment portfolio acquired with the cash collateral consists primarily of investments in reverse repurchase agreements collateralized by U.S. Treasuries and is included in cash and cash equivalents.
  (3)  Included in other liabilities.

Major categories of investment income and related investment expense are summarized as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Fixed maturity securities

     $1,688         $1,629         $1,550     

Equity securities

     4         5         27     

Mortgage loans

     582         451         434     

Real estate

     103         102         120     

Policy loans

     201         202         201     

Partnerships and joint ventures

     106         165         137     

Other

     37         21         10     
  

 

 

 

Gross investment income

     2,721         2,575         2,479     

Investment expense

     164         167         189     
  

 

 

 

Net investment income

       $2,557           $2,408         $2,290     
  

 

 

 

 

PL-26


The components of net realized investment gain (loss) are as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Fixed maturity securities:

        

Gross gains on sales

     $26         $47         $70     

Gross losses on sales

     (8      (14      (7)    
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     18         33         63     
  

 

 

 

Equity securities:

        

Gross gains on sales

     5         7         34     
  

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     5         7         34     
  

 

 

 

FVO securities and trading securities

     (33      69         2     

Real estate

     2         (1      77     

Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives

     60         (706      1,144     

Variable annuity GLB policy fees

     209         199         195     

Variable annuity derivatives - total return swaps

     (21      (96      (469)    

Variable annuity derivatives - futures

     (46      (96      (43)    

Fixed indexed annuity embedded derivatives

     (5      (27      (13)    

Fixed indexed annuity derivatives - futures

     (2      21      

Equity put options

        (32      (359)    

Synthetic GIC policy fees

     44         44         42     

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

     25         26         (96)    

Life indexed account embedded derivatives

     51         (136      (153)    

Life indexed account derivatives - call options

     (58      126         154     

Other

     (15      (28      8     
  

 

 

 

Net realized investment gain (loss)

     $234         ($597      $586     
  

 

 

 

 

PL-27


The tables below summarize the OTTI by investment type:

 

   

Recognized in

 

Earnings

   

Included in

 

OCI

     Total   
 

 

 

 
Year ended December 31, 2015:   (In Millions)  

Corporate securities

    $70          $70    

RMBS

    2        $6          

Perpetual preferred securities

    9            
 

 

 

 

OTTI - fixed maturity and equity securities

    81        6        87    

Mortgage loans

    11          11    

Other investments

    4            
 

 

 

 

Total OTTI

    $96        $6        $102    
 

 

 

 

Year ended December 31, 2014:

     

Corporate securities

    $2          $2    

RMBS

    5        $4          

Perpetual preferred securities

    2            
 

 

 

 

OTTI - fixed maturity and equity securities

    9        4        13    

Mortgage loans

    14          14    

Real estate

    1            
 

 

 

 

Total OTTI

    $24        $4        $28    
 

 

 

 

Year ended December 31, 2013:

     

Corporate securities

    $11          $11    

RMBS

    7        $6        13    
 

 

 

 

OTTI - fixed maturity securities

    18        6        24    

Real estate

    9            
 

 

 

 

Total OTTI

    $27        $6        $33    
 

 

 

 

The table below details the amount of OTTI attributable to credit losses recognized in earnings for which a portion was recognized in OCI:

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
    2015     2014  
 

 

 

 
    (In Millions)   

Cumulative credit loss, January 1

    $188        $217    

Additions for credit impairments recognized on:

   

Securities previously other than temporarily impaired

    2          

Securities not previously other than temporarily impaired

        
 

 

 

 

Total additions

    2          

Reductions for credit impairments previously recognized on:

   

Securities due to an increase in expected cash flows and time value of cash flows

    (3     (5)   

Securities sold

      (29)   
 

 

 

 

Total subtractions

    (3     (34)   
 

 

 

 

Cumulative credit loss, December 31

    $187        $188    
 

 

 

 

 

PL-28


The tables below present gross unrealized losses on investments for which OTTI has been recognized in earnings in current or prior periods and gross unrealized losses on temporarily impaired investments for which no OTTI has been recognized.

 

    Gross Unrealized Losses  
   

OTTI

 

Investments

   

Non-OTTI

 

Investments

    Total  
 

 

 

 
    (In Millions)   

December 31, 2015:

     

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

      $2        $2     

Foreign governments

      6        6     

Corporate securities

    $2        689        691     

RMBS

    35        14        49     

CMBS

      7        7     

Other asset-backed securities

      12        12     
 

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    $37        $730        $767     
 

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

      $4        $4     
 

 

 

 

Total equity securities

    -        $4        $4     
 

 

 

 

December 31, 2014:

     

Foreign governments

      $2        $2     

Corporate securities

      148        148     

RMBS

    $34        9        43     

CMBS

      1        1     

Other asset-backed securities

      1        1     
 

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    $34        $161        $195     
 

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

      $9        $9     
 

 

 

 

Total equity securities

    -        $9        $9     
 

 

 

 
The change in unrealized gain (loss) on investments in available for sale securities is as follows:  
    Years Ended December 31,  
    2015     2014     2013  
 

 

 

 
    (In Millions)   

Available for sale securities:

     

Fixed maturity

    ($1,648     $1,380        ($1,897)   

Equity

      (4     11     
 

 

 

 

Total available for sale securities

    ($1,648     $1,376        ($1,886)   
 

 

 

 

Trading securities, included in other investments, totaled $209 million and $224 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The cumulative net unrealized gain (loss) on trading securities held as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 were ($2) million and $14 million, respectively. Net unrealized gain (loss) recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) on trading securities still held at the reporting date were ($4) million, $1 million and $2 million as of December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

FVO securities consist of U.S. Government securities. FVO securities totaled $536 million and $563 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The change in unrealized gain (loss) on FVO securities is recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) and was ($27) million and $66 million for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Interest income earned from FVO securities is recorded in net investment income and was $17 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

PL-29


As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, fixed maturity securities of $12 million were on deposit with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements.

Mortgage loans totaled $11,092 million and $9,327 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Mortgage loans are collateralized by commercial properties primarily located throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2015, $2,230 million, $1,686 million, $1,421 million, $1,330 million and $1,150 million were located in Texas, New York, California, Washington and District of Columbia, respectively. Included in the December 31, 2015 amount for Texas and New York are $1,050 million and $750 million, respectively, consolidated from the CMBS VIE (Note 4). As of December 31, 2015, $283 million and $196 million were located in Canada and the United Kingdom (UK), respectively. The Company did not have any mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as of December 31, 2015 or 2014. As of December 31, 2015, there was no single mortgage loan investment that exceeded 10% of stockholder’s equity.

The Company reviews the performance and credit quality of the mortgage loan portfolio on an on-going basis, including loan payment and collateral performance. Collateral performance includes a review of the most recent collateral inspection reports and financial statements. Analysts track each loan’s debt service coverage ratio (DCR) and loan-to-value ratio (LTV). The DCR compares the collateral’s net operating income to its debt service payments. DCRs less than 1.0 times indicate that the collateral operations do not generate enough income to cover the loan’s current debt payments. A larger DCR indicates a greater excess of net operating income over the debt service. The LTV compares the amount of the loan to the fair value of the collateral and is commonly expressed as a percentage. LTVs greater than 100% indicate that the loan amount exceeds the collateral value. A smaller LTV percentage indicates a greater excess of collateral value over the loan amount.

The loan review process will result in each loan being placed into a No Credit Concern category or one of three levels: Level 1 Minimal Credit Concern, Level 2 Moderate Credit Concern or Level 3 Significant Credit Concern. Loans in No Credit Concern category are performing and no issues are noted. The collateral exhibits a strong DCR and LTV and there are no near term maturity concerns. The loan credit profile and borrower sponsorship have not experienced any significant changes and remain strong. For construction loans, projects are progressing as planned with no significant cost overruns or delays.

Level 1 loans are experiencing negative market pressure and outlook due to economic factors. Financial covenants may have been triggered due to declines in performance. Credit profile and/or borrower sponsorship remain stable but require monitoring. Near term (6 months or less) maturity requires monitoring due to negative trends. No impairment loss concerns exist under current conditions, however some possibility of loss may exist under stressed scenarios or changes in sponsorship financial strength.

Level 2 loans are experiencing significant or prolonged negative market pressure and uncertain outlook due to economic factors; financial covenants may have been triggered due to declines in performance and/or borrower may have requested covenant relief. Loan credit profile, borrower sponsorship and/or collateral value may have declined or give cause for concern. Near term maturity (12 months or less) coupled with negative market conditions, property performance and value and/or borrower stability result in increased refinance risk.

Level 3 loans are experiencing prolonged and/or severe negative market trends, declines in collateral performance and value, and/or borrower financial difficulties exist. Borrower may have asked for modification of loan terms. Without additional capital infusion and/or acceptable modification to existing loan terms, default is likely and foreclosure the probable alternative. Impairment loss is possible depending on current fair market value of the collateral. This category includes loans in default and previously impaired restructured loans that underperform despite modified terms and/or for which future loss is probable.

Loans classified as Level 2 or Level 3 are placed on a watch list and monitored weekly. Loans that have been identified as Level 3 are evaluated to determine if the loan is impaired. A loan is impaired if it is probable that amounts due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement will not be collected. See Note 12.

As of December 31, 2015, there were 16 loans with a book value of $153 million that were considered impaired and an impairment loss of $12 million (gross of reinsurance of $1 million) was recognized for the year ended December 31, 2015 as the fair value of the underlying collateral of two of these loans was lower than their carrying amount. No impairment loss was recorded on the other 14 loans since the estimated fair value of the collateral was higher than their carrying amount. As of December 31, 2014, there were six loans with a book value of $62 million that were considered impaired. As the estimated fair value of the collateral on three of these loans was lower than their carrying amount, an impairment loss of $18 million (gross of reinsurance of $4 million) was recorded. No impairment loss was recorded on the other three loans since the estimated fair value of the collateral was higher than their carrying amount. Separately during 2014, one loan totaling $40 million was returned to the Company through a deed in lieu of foreclosure process and became a real estate property investment. As of December 31, 2013, there were two loans with a book value of $6 million that were considered impaired. As the estimated fair value of the collateral on these loans was higher than their carrying amount, no impairment loss was recorded.

 

PL-30


The following tables set forth mortgage loan credit levels as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 ($ In Millions):

 

    December 31, 2015  
          Level 1     Level 2     Level 3        
  No Credit Concern     Minimal Credit Concern     Moderate Credit Concern     Significant Credit Concern     Total  
Property Type  

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

 

Apartment

    $640        1.79        $143        1.24        $46        1.06            $829        1.65    

Golf course

    11        2.64        17        0.69        59        1.47        $55        0.87        142        1.23    

Hotel/Lodging

    718        2.12            175        0.70            893        1.84    

Industrial

                18        1.70        18        1.70    

Mobile home park

    195        2.49                    195        2.49    

Office

    3,818        2.03                21        0.32        3,839        2.02    

Office - VIE

    750        3.00                    750        3.00    

Residential

    6        1.44                    6        1.44    

Resort

    478        2.94                    478        2.94    

Retail

    1,613        2.22                    1,613        2.22    

Retail - VIE

    1,050        1.14                    1,050        1.14    

Construction

    1,279                      1,279     

Total mortgage loans

    $10,558        2.09        $160        1.18        $280        0.92        $94        0.91        $11,092        2.03    
    December 31, 2014  
          Level 1     Level 2     Level 3        
  No Credit Concern     Minimal Credit Concern     Moderate Credit Concern     Significant Credit Concern     Total  
Property Type  

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

   

Carrying

 

Amount

   

Weighted

 

Average

 

DCR

 

Apartment

    $573        1.67        $164        1.07        $46        0.95            $783        1.50    

Golf course

    11        2.45        158        1.03        19        1.41        $1        1.04        189        1.15    

Hotel/Lodging

    905        1.96                    905        1.96    

Industrial

                18        0.95        18        0.95    

Mobile home park

    117        2.29                    117        2.29    

Office

    3,869        2.09                25        0.05        3,894        2.08    

Office - VIE

    750        3.11                    750        3.11    

Resort

    479        3.24                    479        3.24    

Retail

    1,168        1.89                    1,168        1.89    

Construction

    1,024                      1,024     

Total mortgage loans

    $8,896        2.19        $322        1.05        $65        1.08        $44        0.44        $9,327        2.12    

Real estate investments totaled $345 million and $329 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The Company had no real estate investment impairments during the year ended December 31, 2015. As of December 31, 2014, there were four properties with a book value prior to impairment measurement of $10 million that were considered impaired and an impairment loss of $1 million was recognized as the fair value of these properties was lower than their carrying amount. As of December 31, 2013, there were four properties with a book value prior to measurement of $20 million that were considered impaired and an impairment loss of $9 million was recognized as the fair value of these properties was lower than their carrying amount. See Note 12.

 

PL-31


7. AIRCRAFT, NET

Aircraft, net, consists of the following:

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
     (In Millions)  

Aircraft

         $9,152             $8,453   

Aircraft held by consolidated VIEs

     1,097         1,307   
     10,249         9,760   

Accumulated depreciation

     1,942         1,943   

Aircraft, net

     $8,307         $7,817   

As of December 31, 2015, domestic and foreign future minimum rentals scheduled to be received under the noncancelable portion of leases are as follows (In Millions):

 

         2016              2017              2018              2019              2020            Thereafter    

Domestic

     $142         $130         $123         $120         $120         $300   

Foreign

     749         694         634         546         439         1,198   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total leases

           $891               $824               $757               $666               $559               $1,498   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Included in the table above are aircraft subleased to airlines with lease maturity dates ranging from 2021 to 2024 with total future rentals of $189 million. The revenue related to these aircraft, included in aircraft leasing revenue, was $27 million, $27 million, and $22 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. During 2011 to 2013, these aircraft were sold to third parties and subsequently leased back under operating leases with maturity dates ranging from 2023 to 2025 with total minimum future lease commitments on these operating leases of $181 million.

As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, aircraft under operating lease with a carrying amount of $2,871 million and $3,462 million, respectively, were assigned as collateral to secure debt (Notes 4 and 11).

During the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, aircraft impairments of $39 million, $37 million and $28 million, respectively, were recognized and included in operating and other expenses. See Note 12.

Three and nine aircraft were not subject to a signed lease or sales commitment, collectively representing approximately 1% and 2% of the carrying amount of aircraft as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

During the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, gain (loss) on the sale of aircraft of ($1) million, $8 million and $7 million, respectively, were recognized and included in other income. Aircraft held for sale totaled $244 million and $65 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, and are included in aircraft, net.

During 2006, ACG and a bank sponsored a 50/50 joint venture. As ACG maintained control over the joint venture activities, ACG had a controlling financial interest and consolidated it as a subsidiary. During 2015, the non-recourse debt was paid off (Note 11) and ACG assumed the bank’s unfunded portion of the liabilities in exchange for the bank’s 50% equity interest. As a result, the noncontrolling interest related to this joint venture of $30 million was reduced to zero as of December 31, 2015.

See Note 18 for future aircraft purchase commitments.

 

8. DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES

The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, equity risk, and credit risk. Derivative instruments are also used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments including swaps, exchange-traded futures and options. In addition, certain insurance products offered by the Company contain features that are accounted for as derivatives.

 

PL-32


Accounting for derivatives and hedging activities requires the Company to recognize all derivative instruments as either assets or liabilities at estimated fair value in its consolidated statements of financial condition. The Company applies hedge accounting by designating derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the inception date of the hedging relationship. At the inception of the hedging relationship, the Company formally documents its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedging transaction. In this documentation, the Company specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that has been designated as the hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally assesses and measures effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis in accordance with its risk management policy.

DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGING

The Company has certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host contract, and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative.

The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal over a ten-year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain restrictions. These variable annuity GLBs are considered embedded derivatives.

GLBs on variable annuity contracts issued between January 1, 2007 and March 31, 2009 are partially reinsured by third party reinsurers. These reinsurance arrangements are used to offset a portion of the Company’s exposure to the GLBs for the lives of the host variable annuity contracts issued. The ceded portion of these GLBs is considered an embedded derivative. The Company also reinsures certain variable annuity contracts with guaranteed minimum benefits to an affiliated reinsurer.

The Company employs hedging strategies (variable annuity derivatives) to mitigate equity risk associated with the GLBs not covered by reinsurance. The Company utilizes total return swaps based upon the S&P 500 Index and the MSCI EAFE (Europe, Australasia and Far East) Index and exchange-traded equity futures based upon broad equity market indices to economically hedge the equity risk of the guarantees in its variable annuity products. The total return swaps provide periodic payments to the Company in exchange for the return of the S&P 500 and MSCI EAFE indices in the form of a payment or receipt, depending on whether the return relative to the index on trade date is positive or negative. In exchange-traded futures transactions, the Company agrees to purchase or sell a specified number of contracts, the values of which are determined by the underlying equity indices, and to post variation margin on a daily basis in an amount equal to the change in the daily estimated fair value of those contracts. The Company also utilizes interest rate swaps to manage interest rate risk in variable annuity GLBs.

The Company offers a fixed indexed annuity product where interest is credited to the policyholder’s account balance based on equity index changes. A policyholder may allocate the contract’s net accumulated value to one or a combination of the following: fixed return account at a guaranteed interest rate to be no less than 1% for a specified period of time, one or two-year S&P 500 indexed account with caps, or one or two-year global indexed account with caps. The indexed products contain embedded derivatives. The Company utilizes exchange-traded equity futures based upon broad market indices and total return swaps based upon the MSCI EAFE index to economically hedge the credit paid to the policyholder on the underlying equity index.

The Company used equity put options to hedge equity and credit risks. These equity put options involved the exchange of either an upfront payment or periodic fixed rate payments for the return, at the end of the option agreement, of the equity index below a specified strike price.

The Company issues synthetic GICs to Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) qualified defined contribution employee benefit plans (ERISA Plan) that are considered derivatives. The ERISA Plan uses the contracts in its stable value fixed income option. The Company receives a fee, recognized in net realized investment gain (loss), for providing book value accounting for the ERISA Plan stable value fixed income option. In the event that plan participant elections exceed the estimated fair value of the assets or if the contract is terminated and at the end of the termination period the book value under the contract exceeds the estimated fair value of the assets, then the Company is required to pay the ERISA Plan the difference between book value and estimated fair value. The Company mitigates the investment risk through pre-approval and monitoring of the investment guidelines, requiring high quality investments and adjustments to the plan crediting rates to compensate for unrealized losses in the portfolios. The estimated fair value of the derivative is zero as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert fixed or floating rate foreign-denominated assets or liabilities to U.S. dollar fixed or floating rate assets or liabilities. A foreign currency interest rate swap involves the exchange of an initial principal amount in two currencies and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date at an agreed-upon exchange rate. There are also periodic exchanges of interest payments in the two currencies at specified intervals, calculated using agreed-upon

 

PL-33


interest rates, exchange rates, and the exchanged principal amounts. The Company enters into these agreements primarily to manage the currency risk associated with investments and liabilities that are denominated in foreign currencies. The main currencies that the Company economically hedges are the euro, British pound, Canadian dollar, and Japanese yen.

Interest rate swaps are used by the Company to reduce market risk from changes in interest rates and other interest rate exposure arising from duration mismatches between assets and liabilities. An interest rate swap agreement involves the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.

The Company offers life insurance products with indexed account options. The interest credited on the indexed accounts is a function of the underlying index. Indexed accounts currently offered by the Company include: one-year S&P 500 indexed account currently capped at 8% to 11%, one-year S&P 500 indexed uncapped account currently with a 5% threshold, one-year international indexed account currently capped at 11%, two-year S&P 500 indexed account currently capped at 30% and five-year S&P 500 indexed uncapped account. The life insurance products with indexed accounts contain embedded derivatives.

The Company utilizes call options to hedge the credit paid to the policyholder on the underlying index for its life insurance products with indexed account options. These options are contracts to buy the index at a predetermined time at a contracted price. The contracts will be net settled in cash based on differentials in the index at the time of exercise and the strike price subject to a cap, net of option premiums and the settlements are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

The Company had the following outstanding derivatives not designated as a hedge:

 

     Notional Amount  
     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives

           $31,562               $33,717   

Variable annuity derivatives - total return swaps

     1,683         1,445   

Variable annuity derivatives - futures

     888         758   

Variable annuity derivatives - interest rate swaps

     110         135   

Fixed indexed annuity embedded derivatives

     2,638         1,622   

Fixed indexed annuity derivatives - total return swaps

     12      

Fixed indexed annuity derivatives - futures

     410         152   

Synthetic GICs

     21,451         21,587   

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

     1,225         2,721   

Life indexed account embedded derivatives

     3,251         2,421   

Life indexed account derivatives - call options

     3,528         2,519   

Other

     778         345   

Notional amount represents a standard of measurement of the volume of derivatives. Notional amount is not a quantification of market risk or credit risk and is not recorded in the consolidated statements of financial condition. Notional amounts generally represent those amounts used to calculate contractual cash flows to be exchanged and are not paid or received, except for certain contracts such as currency swaps. Notional amounts for variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives represent deposits into variable annuity contracts covered by embedded derivative riders as a measurement of volume. 13.0% and 13.1% of these notional amounts are reinsured by third-party reinsurers as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. 4.1% of these notional amounts are reinsured by an affiliated reinsurer as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

PL-34


The following table summarizes amounts recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) for derivatives not designated as a hedge. Gains and losses include the changes in estimated fair value of the derivatives and amounts realized on terminations. The amounts presented do not include the periodic net payments and amortization of $191 million, $288 million and $554 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively, which are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

 

     Amount of Gain (Loss)  
     Recognized in  
     Income on Derivatives  
     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
     (In Millions)  

Variable annuity derivatives - total return swaps

     $2          $27          ($96)   

Equity put options

        (23)         (259)   

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

     67                  (75)   

Life indexed account derivatives - call options

     59          206          208    

Other

     (5)              

Embedded derivatives:

        

Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives

     60          (706)         1,144    

Fixed indexed annuity embedded derivatives

     (5)         (27)         (13)   

Life indexed account embedded derivatives

     51          (136)         (153)   

Other

              (2)         (2)   

Total

     $229         ($660)         $756    

DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS CASH FLOW HEDGES

The Company primarily utilizes foreign currency and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to changes in foreign currencies and in benchmark interest rates. These cash flows include those associated with existing assets and liabilities. The maximum length of time over which the Company is hedging its exposure to variability in future cash flows for forecasted transactions does not exceed 6 years.

The Company had outstanding foreign currency and interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges with notional amounts of $310 million and $453 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The Company had gains recognized in OCI for changes in estimated fair value of foreign currency and interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges of $7 million, $18 million and $42 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, all of the hedged forecasted transactions for designated cash flow hedges were determined to be probable of occurring.

Hedge ineffectiveness related to cash flow hedges was zero, $1 million and zero for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

Amounts reclassified from AOCI to earnings resulting from the discontinuance of cash flow hedges due to forecasted cash flows that were no longer probable of occurring were zero for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013. Over the next twelve months, the Company anticipates that $2 million of deferred gains on derivative instruments in AOCI will be reclassified to earnings consistent with when the hedged forecasted transaction affects earnings.

DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS FAIR VALUE HEDGES

The Company had no fair value hedges as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

PL-35


CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT IMPACT

Derivative instruments are recorded on the Company’s consolidated statements of financial condition at estimated fair value and are presented as assets or liabilities based upon the net position for each derivative counterparty by legal entity, taking into account income accruals and net cash collateral. The following table summarizes the gross asset or liability derivative estimated fair value and excludes the impact of offsetting asset and liability positions held with the same counterparty, cash collateral payables and receivables and income accruals. See Note 12 for information on the Company’s estimated fair value measurements and disclosure.

 

    Asset Derivatives         Liability Derivatives      
    Estimated Fair Value         Estimated Fair Value      
    December 31,         December 31,      
    2015     2014         2015     2014      
    (In Millions)         (In Millions)      

Derivatives designated as hedging instruments:

           

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

      $3      (1)      
    $5              (5)     $12        $22      (5)

Total derivatives designated as hedging instruments

    5        3          12        22     

Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:

           

Variable annuity derivatives - total return swaps

    12        3      (1)     5        8      (1)
    3        3      (5)     2        4      (5)

Variable annuity derivatives - interest rate swaps

    3        2      (1)     1        3      (1)

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

    108        34      (1)     8        20      (1)
    13        32      (5)     28        133      (5)

Life indexed account derivatives - call options

    66        146      (1)     1        (1)
    19        48      (5)     1        (5)

Embedded derivatives:

           

Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives (including reinsurance contracts)

    190        204      (2)     1,200        1,274      (3)

Fixed indexed annuity embedded derivatives

          167        110      (4)

Life indexed account embedded derivatives

          191        278      (4)

Other

          1        (2)
          7        3      (4)
          3        4      (5)

Total derivatives not designated as hedging instruments

    414        472          1,615        1,837     

Total derivatives

    $419        $475          $1,627        $1,859     

Location on the consolidated statements of financial condition:

(1) Other investments (2) Other assets (3) Future policy benefits (4) Policyholder account balances (5) Other liabilities

Cash collateral received from counterparties was $74 million and $132 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. This unrestricted cash collateral is included in cash and cash equivalents and the obligation to return it is netted against the estimated fair value of derivatives in other investments or other liabilities. Cash collateral pledged to counterparties was $71 million and $61 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. A receivable representing the right to call this collateral back from the counterparty is netted against the estimated fair value of derivatives in other investments or other liabilities. Net exposure to the counterparty is calculated as the estimated fair value of all derivative positions with the counterparty, net of income or expense accruals and cash collateral paid or received. If the net exposure to the counterparty is positive, the amount is reflected in other investments, whereas, if the net exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in other liabilities.

 

PL-36


As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company had also accepted collateral, consisting of various securities, with an estimated fair value of $45 million and $24 million, respectively, which are held in separate custodial accounts and are not recorded in the consolidated statements of financial condition. The Company is permitted by contract to sell or repledge this collateral and as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, none of the collateral had been sold or repledged. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company provided collateral in the form of various securities with an estimated fair value of $5 million, which are included in fixed maturity securities. The counterparties are permitted by contract to sell or repledge this collateral.

OFFSETTING ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

The following table reconciles the net amount of derivative assets and liabilities reported in the consolidated statements of financial condition (excluding embedded derivatives) subject to master netting arrangements after the offsetting of collateral. Gross amounts include income or expense accruals. Gross amounts offset include cash collateral received or pledged limited to the gross estimated fair value of recognized derivative assets or liabilities, net of accruals. Excess cash collateral received or pledged is not included in the tables due to the foregoing limitation. Gross amounts not offset include asset collateral received or pledged limited to the gross estimated fair value of recognized derivative assets and liabilities.

 

   

Gross Amounts of

 

Recognized

 

Assets/Liabilities (1)

   

Gross Amounts

 

Offset (2)

   

Net

 

Amounts

   

Gross Amounts

 

Not Offset -

 

Asset Collateral

    Net Amounts  
    (In Millions)   

December 31, 2015:

         

Derivative assets

    $191        ($125     $66        ($45     $21   

Derivative liabilities

    107        (67     40          40   

December 31, 2014:

         

Derivative assets

    $233        ($191     $42        ($23     $19   

Derivative liabilities

    202        (89     113          113   

 

  (1)  As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, derivative assets include expense accruals of $22 million and $38 million, respectively, and derivative liabilities include expense accruals of $66 million and $12 million, respectively.
  (2)  As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company received excess cash collateral of $1 million and $4 million, respectively, and provided excess cash collateral of $1 million and zero, respectively, which are not included in the table.

CREDIT EXPOSURE AND CREDIT RISK RELATED CONTINGENT FEATURES

The Company is exposed to credit-related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties to over the counter (OTC) derivatives, which are bilateral contracts between two counterparties. The Company manages credit risk by dealing with creditworthy counterparties, establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and obtaining collateral where appropriate. In addition, the Company evaluates the financial stability of each counterparty before entering into each agreement and throughout the period that the financial instrument is owned.

The Company’s exchange-traded futures are transacted through regulated exchanges and variation margin is settled on a daily basis. Therefore, the Company has little exposure to credit-related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties. In addition, the Company is required to pledge initial margin for all futures contracts. The amount of required margin is determined by the exchange on which it is traded. The Company currently pledges cash and securities to satisfy this collateral requirement.

For OTC derivative transactions, the Company enters into legally enforceable master netting agreements which provide for the netting of payments and receipts with a single counterparty. The net position with each counterparty is calculated as the aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with each counterparty, net of income or expense accruals and collateral paid or received. These master netting agreements may also include collateral arrangements with derivative counterparties, which may require both the pledge and acceptance of collateral when the net estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives reaches a pre-determined threshold.

The Company’s credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated fair value, net of accrued income or expenses and collateral received, if any. The Company’s credit exposure for OTC derivatives as of December 31, 2015 was $20 million. The maximum exposure to any single counterparty was $6 million at December 31, 2015. All of the Company’s credit exposure from derivative contracts is with investment grade counterparties.

 

PL-37


The Company’s collateral arrangements for its OTC derivatives include credit-contingent provisions that provide for a reduction of collateral thresholds in the event of downgrades in the financial strength ratings, assigned by certain independent rating agencies, of the Company and/or the counterparty. If either the Company’s or the counterparty’s financial strength ratings were to fall below a specific investment grade credit rating, the other party to the derivative instruments could request immediate and ongoing full collateralization on derivative instruments in net liability positions. The aggregate estimated fair value of all OTC derivative instruments with credit risk related contingent features that were in a liability position on December 31, 2015, was $31 million for which the Company has posted collateral of $14 million. If certain of the Company’s financial strength ratings were to fall one notch as of December 31, 2015, the Company would have been required to post an additional $7 million of collateral to its counterparties.

The OTC master agreements may include a termination event clause associated with financial strength ratings assigned by certain independent rating agencies. If these financial strength ratings were to fall below a specified level, as defined within each counterparty master agreement or if one of the rating agencies were to cease to provide a financial strength rating, the counterparty could terminate the master agreement with payment due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2015, the Company’s financial strength ratings were above the specified level.

 

9. POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES

POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES

The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
     (In Millions)   

UL

     $25,812         $24,642   

Annuity and deposit liabilities

     14,894         13,310   

Funding agreements

     295         714   

Life indexed account embedded derivatives

     191         278   

Fixed indexed annuity embedded derivatives

     167         110   

GICs

        115   

Total

       $41,359         $39,169   

FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS

The detail of the liability for future policy benefits is as follows:

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
     (In Millions)   

Annuity reserves

     $7,620         $7,725   

Policy benefits payable

     2,773         2,206   

Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives

     1,200         1,274   

URR

     1,138         818   

Life insurance

     970         833   

Closed Block liabilities

     268         266   

Other

     119         78   

Total

       $14,088         $13,200   

 

PL-38


10. SEPARATE ACCOUNTS AND GUARANTEED BENEFIT FEATURES

The Company issues variable annuity contracts through separate accounts for which investment income and investment gains and losses accrue directly to, and investment risk is borne by, the contract holder (traditional variable annuities). These contracts also include various types of GMDB and GLB features. For a discussion of certain GLBs accounted for as embedded derivatives, see Note 8.

The GMDBs provide a specified minimum return upon death. Many of these death benefits are spousal, whereby a death benefit will be paid upon death of the first spouse. The survivor has the option to terminate the contract or continue it and have the death benefit paid into the contract and a second death benefit paid upon the survivor’s death. The GMDB features include those where the Company contractually guarantees to the contract holder either (a) return of no less than total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals (return of net deposits), (b) the highest contract value on any contract anniversary date through age 80 minus any payments or partial withdrawals following the contract anniversary (anniversary contract value), or (c) the highest of contract value on certain specified dates or total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals plus a minimum return (minimum return).

The guaranteed minimum income benefit (GMIB) is a GLB that provides the contract holder with a guaranteed annuitization value after 10 years. Annuitization value is generally based on deposits adjusted for withdrawals plus a minimum return. In general, the GMIB requires contract holders to invest in an approved asset allocation strategy.

The Company offers variable and fixed annuity contracts with guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits for life (GMWBL) features. The GMWBL is a GLB that provides, subject to certain restrictions, a percentage of a contract holder’s guaranteed payment base will be available for withdrawal for life starting at age 59.5, regardless of market performance. The rider terminates upon death of the contract holder or their spouse if a spousal form of the rider is purchased.

Information in the event of death on the various GMDB features outstanding was as follows (the Company’s variable annuity contracts with guarantees may offer more than one type of guarantee in each contract; therefore, the amounts listed are not mutually exclusive):

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014      
     ($ In Millions)  

Return of net deposits

     

Separate account value

     $49,682         $53,187   

Net amount at risk (1)

     1,083         581   

Average attained age of contract holders

     66 years         65 years   

Anniversary contract value

     

Separate account value

     $13,835         $15,206   

Net amount at risk (1)

     930         536   

Average attained age of contract holders

     67 years         66 years   

Minimum return

     

Separate account value

     $884         $995   

Net amount at risk (1)

     449         406   

Average attained age of contract holders

     71 years         70 years   

 

  (1)  Represents the amount of death benefit in excess of the current contract holder account balance as of December 31.

 

PL-39


Information regarding GMIB and GMWBL features outstanding is as follows:

 

    December 31,     December 31,  
    2015     2014     2015     2014  
 

 

 

   

 

 

 
    GMIB     GMWBL  
    ($ In Millions)     ($ In Millions)  

Separate account value

    $1,755        $2,027        $5,422        $5,220   

Net amount at risk (1)

    265        183        431        119   

Average attained age of contract holders

    62 years        61 years        66 years        65 years   

 

  (1)  GMIB net amount at risk represents the amount of estimated annuitization benefits in excess of the current contract holder account balance at December 31. GMWBL net amount at risk represents the protected balance, as defined, in excess of account value at December 31.

The determination of GMDB, GMIB and GMWBL liabilities is based on models that involve a range of scenarios and assumptions, including those regarding expected market rates of return and volatility, contract surrender rates and mortality experience. The following table summarizes the GMDB, GMIB and GMWBL liabilities, which are recorded in future policy benefits, and changes in these liabilities, which are reflected in policy benefits paid or provided:

 

     December 31,      December 31,      December 31,  
     2015      2014      2015      2014      2015      2014  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     GMDB      GMIB      GMWBL  
     (In Millions)      (In Millions)      (In Millions)  

Balance, beginning of year

     $5             $25          $18          $21          $11    

Changes in reserves

     15          $15          18          10          32          10    

Benefits paid

     (11)         (10)         (3)         (3)         
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Balance, end of year

             $9                  $5                  $40                  $25                  $53                  $21    
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Variable annuity contracts with guarantees were invested in separate account investment options as follows:

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Asset type

     

Equity

     $30,300         $32,496   

Bonds

     15,666         17,143   

Money market

     319         259   

Other

     3,619         3,495   
  

 

 

 

Total separate account value

             $49,904                 $53,393   
  

 

 

 

 

PL-40


In addition, the Company issues certain life insurance contracts whereby the Company contractually guarantees to the contract holder a death benefit even when there is insufficient value to cover monthly mortality and expense charges, whereas otherwise the contract would typically lapse.

FDNLGR liabilities are determined by estimating the expected value of FDNLGR costs incurred when the policyholder account balance is projected to be zero and recognizing those costs over the accumulation period based on total expected assessments. The assumptions used in estimating the FDNLGR liability are consistent with those used for amortizing DAC. The FDNLGR costs used in calculating the FDNLGR liability are based on the average FDNLGR costs incurred over a range of scenarios.

The following table summarizes the FDNLGR liability, which are recorded in future policy benefits, and changes in these liabilities, which are reflected in policy benefits paid or provided:

 

     Direct      Ceded      Net  
     (In Millions)  

Balance, January 1, 2013

     $279          $105          $174    

Incurred guaranteed benefits

     40          (5)         45    

Paid guaranteed benefits

     (7)            (7)   
  

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2013

     312          100          212    

Incurred guaranteed benefits

     111          26          85    

Paid guaranteed benefits

     (7)            (7)   
  

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2014

     416          126          290    

Incurred guaranteed benefits

     142          29          113    

Paid guaranteed benefits

     (1)            (1)   
  

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2015

             $557          $155          $402    
  

 

 

 

Information regarding life insurance contracts included in the FDNLGR liability is as follows:

 

     December 31,  
     2015      2014  
  

 

 

 
     ($ In Millions)  

Net amount at risk (1)

     $16,905         $17,230   

Average attained age of policyholders

     59 years         58 years   

 

  (1)  Represents the amount of death benefit in excess of the current policyholder account balance as of December 31.

 

PL-41


11. DEBT

Debt consists of the following:

 

     December 31,  
         2015              2014      
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Short-term debt:

     

Credit facility recourse only to ACG

     $485         $266     

Other VIE debt (Note 4)

     10         2     
  

 

 

 

Total short-term debt

     $495         $268     
  

 

 

 

Long-term debt:

     

Surplus notes

             $1,771         $1,771     

Fair value hedge adjustments - terminated interest rate swap agreements

     271         277     

Note payable to Pacific LifeCorp

     15      

Non-recourse long-term debt:

     

Debt recourse only to ACG

     5,021         4,525     

ACG non-recourse debt

        307     

Other non-recourse debt

     214         106     

ACG VIE debt (Note 4)

     282         401     

CMBS VIE debt (Note 4)

     1,521         676     
  

 

 

 

Total long-term debt

     $9,095         $8,063     
  

 

 

 

SHORT-TERM DEBT

Pacific Life maintains a $700 million commercial paper program. There was no commercial paper debt outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. In addition, Pacific Life has a bank revolving credit facility of $400 million maturing in October 2019 that will serve as a back-up line of credit to the commercial paper program. Interest is at variable rates. This facility had no debt outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. As of and during the year ended December 31, 2015, Pacific Life was in compliance with the debt covenants related to these facilities.

The Company maintains reverse repurchase lines of credit with various financial institutions. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest based on collateral and market conditions. There was no debt outstanding in connection with these reverse repurchase lines of credit as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

Pacific Life is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB) of Topeka. Pacific Life is eligible to receive advances from the FHLB of Topeka based on a percentage of Pacific Life’s statutory general account assets provided it has sufficient available eligible collateral and is in compliance with the FHLB of Topeka requirements, debt covenant restrictions and insurance law and regulations. The Company had estimated available eligible collateral of $1.8 billion as of December 31, 2015. Interest is at variable or fixed rates. The Company had no debt outstanding with the FHLB of Topeka as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

PL&A is a member of the FHLB of San Francisco. PL&A is eligible to receive advances from the FHLB of San Francisco based on a percentage of PL&A’s net admitted assets provided it has sufficient available eligible collateral and is in compliance with the FHLB of San Francisco requirements and insurance law and regulations. PL&A had estimated available eligible collateral of $46 million as of December 31, 2015. Interest is at variable or fixed rates. PL&A had no debt outstanding with the FHLB of San Francisco as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

ACG has revolving credit agreements with banks for a $1,165 million borrowing capacity. Interest on these loans is at variable rates, payable monthly and ranged from 1.9% to 2.1% as of December 31, 2015 and was 1.9% as of December 31, 2014. The facilities expire at various dates ranging from 2017 to 2019. There was $485 million and $266 million outstanding in connection with these revolving credit agreements as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. These credit agreements are recourse only to ACG.

 

PL-42


During 2015, ACG entered into a loan facility with several Japanese banks that is denominated in Japanese yen with a U.S. dollar equivalent of approximately $192 million as of December 31, 2015. Interest is at variable rates. ACG has not drawn on the loan facility as of December 31, 2015. This loan facility is recourse only to ACG.

LONG-TERM DEBT

Pacific Life has $677 million of surplus notes outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, at a fixed interest rate of 9.25%, maturing on June 15, 2039. Interest is payable semiannually on June 15 and December 15. Pacific Life may redeem these surplus notes at its option, subject to the approval of the NE DOI for such optional redemption. The surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. All future payments of interest and principal on these surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the NE DOI. On January 22, 2013, Pacific Life, with the approval of the NE DOI, exercised its early settlement right and repurchased and retired $323 million of the originally issued $1 billion of 9.25% surplus notes. The partial retirement of these surplus notes was accounted for as an extinguishment of debt and the related amortization of fair value hedge adjustments (see below) of $112 million and the premium paid of $155 million were recognized in interest expense during the year ended December 31, 2013. During 2011, Pacific Life terminated interest rate swaps converting these surplus notes to variable rate notes and fair value hedge adjustments of $364 million were recorded as of the termination date and are being amortized as a reduction to interest expense over the remaining life of the surplus notes using the effective interest method. The resulting effective interest rate of these surplus notes is 6.4%. Total unamortized fair value hedge adjustments were $231 million and $234 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

Pacific Life has $150 million of surplus notes outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, at a fixed interest rate of 7.9%, maturing on December 30, 2023. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 30. These surplus notes may not be redeemed at the option of Pacific Life or any holder of the surplus notes. The surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. All future payments of interest and principal on these surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the NE DOI. During 2011, Pacific Life terminated interest rate swaps converting the 7.9% surplus notes to variable rate notes and fair value hedge adjustments of $56 million as of the termination date were recorded and are being amortized as a reduction to interest expense over the remaining life of the surplus notes using the effective interest method. The resulting effective interest rate of these surplus notes is 4.0%. Total unamortized fair value hedge adjustments were $40 million and $43 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

The NE DOI approved the issuance of an internal surplus note by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp for $450 million. Pacific Life is required to pay Pacific LifeCorp interest on the internal surplus note semiannually on February 5 and August 5 at a fixed annual rate of 6.0%. All future payments of interest and principal on the internal surplus note can be made only with the prior approval of the NE DOI. The internal surplus note matures on February 5, 2020. The carrying amount outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $450 million.

The NE DOI approved the issuance of an internal surplus note by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp for $500 million with net cash proceeds of $494 million. The original issue discount of $6 million is being amortized over the life of this surplus note. Pacific Life is required to pay Pacific LifeCorp interest on the internal surplus note semiannually on January 25 and July 25 at a fixed annual rate of 5.125%. All future payments of interest and principal on the internal surplus note can be made only with the prior approval of the NE DOI. The internal surplus note matures on January 25, 2043. The carrying amount outstanding as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $494 million.

In November 2015, Pacific Life Reinsurance Company II Limited (PLRC), an exempt life reinsurance company domiciled in Barbados and wholly owned by Pacific Life, entered into a promissory note with Pacific LifeCorp to borrow up to $50 million. As of December 31, 2015, $15 million was outstanding on the note with an interest rate of 3.8% and matures on December 31, 2017.

ACG enters into various secured loans that are guaranteed by the U.S. Export-Import bank or by the European Export Credit Agencies. Interest on these loans is payable quarterly and ranged from 0.6% to 3.9% as of December 31, 2015 and 0.5% to 4.1% as of December 31, 2014. As of December 31, 2015, $1,342 million was outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2016 to 2024. As of December 31, 2014, $1,512 million was outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse only to ACG.

ACG enters into various senior unsecured notes and loans with third-parties. Interest on these notes and loans is payable quarterly or semi-annually and ranged from 1.2% to 7.2% as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. As of December 31, 2015, $3,679 million was outstanding on these notes and loans with maturities ranging from 2016 to 2025. As of December 31, 2014, $3,013 million was outstanding on these notes and loans. These notes and loans are recourse only to ACG.

ACG had a secured facility to finance aircraft. Interest on this facility accrued at variable rates, was payable monthly and was 3.6% as of December 31, 2014. As of December 31, 2014, $307 million was outstanding on this facility. This debt was paid off in December 2015 (Note 7). This facility was non-recourse to the Company.

 

PL-43


Certain subsidiaries of Pacific Asset Holding LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, enter into various real estate property related loans with various third-parties. Interest on these loans accrues at fixed and variable rates and is payable monthly. Fixed rates were 3.6% as of December 31, 2015 and ranged from 3.6% to 5.4% as of December 31, 2014. The variable rates ranged from 1.7% to 2.6% as of December 31, 2015 and were 2.4% as of December 31, 2014. As of December 31, 2015, there was $161 million outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2016 to 2019. As of December 31, 2014, there was $106 million outstanding on these loans. All of these loans are secured by real estate properties and are non-recourse to the Company.

As of December 31, 2015, the Company has a secured borrowing of $53 million due to an unrelated third-party. Payments of principal and interest are due monthly with an effective rate of 4.7% that matures on September 1, 2026. The lender’s collateral for the amount borrowed is a participation interest in two of the Company’s commercial mortgage loans that are secured by real estate property and is non-recourse to the Company.

As of December 31, 2015, the Company was in compliance with all its debt covenants.

The following summarizes aggregate scheduled principal payments during the next five years and thereafter:

 

          Non-recourse Debt        
          Notes     Debt     Other        
    Surplus     Payable to     Recourse     Non-recourse        
    Notes     Pacific LifeCorp     Only to ACG     Debt     Total  

Years Ending December 31:

  (In Millions)  

2016

        $787          $25          $812     

2017

      $15          342          47          404     

2018

        1,374          56          1,430     

2019

        170          36          206     

2020

    $450            959          50          1,459     

Thereafter

    1,321            1,389            2,710     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

            $1,771                  $15                  $5,021                  $214                  $7,021     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The table above excludes VIE debt and fair value hedge adjustments.

 

12. ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic establishes a hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs of valuation methods used to measure estimated fair value for financial assets and financial liabilities that are carried at estimated fair value. The determination of estimated fair value requires the use of observable market data when available. The hierarchy consists of the following three levels that are prioritized based on observable and unobservable inputs.

 

Level 1    Unadjusted quoted prices for identical instruments in active markets. Level 1 financial instruments include securities that are traded in an active exchange market.
Level 2    Observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in inactive markets; and model-derived valuations for which all significant inputs are observable market data.
Level 3    Valuations derived from valuation techniques in which one or more significant inputs are not market observable.

 

PL-44


The following tables present, by estimated fair value hierarchy level, the Company’s financial assets and liabilities that are carried at estimated fair value as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

                          Gross               
                          Derivatives               
                          Estimated      Netting        
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3      Fair Value      Adjustments (1)     Total  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2015:

                

Assets:

                

U.S. Government

        $57                 $57    

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

        909         $29              938    

Foreign governments

        584         8              592    

Corporate securities

        31,046         1,620              32,666    

RMBS

        2,405         151              2,556    

CMBS

        759         54              813    

Collateralized debt obligations

           65              65    

Other asset-backed securities

        719         319              1,038    
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     -         36,479         2,246         -         -        38,725    
  

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

        86                 86    

Other equity securities

     $2                      
  

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     2         86         -         -         -        88    
  

 

 

 

FVO securities

        536                 536    
  

 

 

 

Other investments:

                

Trading securities

     4         205                 209    

Other investments (2)

     3         147         5              155    

Other investments measured at NAV (3)

                   74    
  

 

 

 

Total other investments carried at fair value

     7         352         5         -         -        438    
  

 

 

 

Derivatives:

                

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

        129            $129         ($27     102    

Equity derivatives

           100         100         (28     72    

Embedded derivatives

           190         190           190    
  

 

 

 

Total derivatives

     -         129         290         419         (55     364    
  

 

 

 

Separate account assets:

                

Separate account assets

     56,632         114                 56,746    

Separate account assets measured at NAV (3)

                   228    
  

 

 

 

Total separate account assets carried at fair value (4)

     56,632         114         -         -         -        56,974    
  

 

 

 

Total

         $56,641         $37,696         $2,541         $419         ($55     $97,125    
  

 

 

 

Liabilities:

                

Derivatives:

                

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

        $49            $49         ($27     $22    

Equity derivatives

           $9         9         (28     (19)    

Embedded derivatives

           1,569         1,569           1,569    
  

 

 

 

Total

     -         $49         $1,578         $1,627         ($55     $1,572    
  

 

 

 

 

PL-45


                          Gross               
                          Derivatives               
                          Estimated      Netting        
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3      Fair Value      Adjustments (1)     Total  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

December 31, 2014:

                

Assets:

                

U.S. Government

        $56                 $56    

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

        988         $29              1,017    

Foreign governments

        603         56              659    

Corporate securities

        27,903         1,816              29,719    

RMBS

        2,690         14              2,704    

CMBS

        653         4              657    

Collateralized debt obligations

           70              70    

Other asset-backed securities

        492         288              780    
  

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     -         33,385         2,277         -         -        35,662    
  

 

 

 

Perpetual preferred securities

        125                 125    

Other equity securities

     $2            4                
  

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     2         125         4         -         -        131    
  

 

 

 

FVO securities

        563                 563    
  

 

 

 

Other investments:

                

Trading securities

     74         145         5              224    

Other investments (2)

     2         126         5              133    

Other investments measured at NAV (3)

                   57    
  

 

 

 

Total other investments carried at fair value

     76         271         10         -         -        414    
  

 

 

 

Derivatives:

                

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

        71            $71         ($55     16    

Equity derivatives

           200         200         (59     141    

Embedded derivatives

           204         204           204    
  

 

 

 

Total derivatives

     -         71         404         475         (114     361    
  

 

 

 

Separate account assets:

                

Separate account assets

     60,254         112         5              60,371    

Separate account assets measured at NAV (3)

                   203    
  

 

 

 

Total separate account assets carried at fair value (4)

     60,254         112         5         -         -        60,574    
  

 

 

 

Total

     $60,332         $34,527         $2,700         $475         ($114     $97,705    
  

 

 

 

Liabilities:

                

Derivatives:

                

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

        $178            $178         ($55     $123    

Equity derivatives

           $12         12         (59     (47)    

Embedded derivatives

           1,669         1,669           1,669    
  

 

 

 

Total

     -         $178         $1,681         $1,859         ($114     $1,745    
  

 

 

 

 

  (1)  Netting adjustments represent the impact of offsetting asset and liability positions on the consolidated statements of financial condition held with the same counterparty as permitted by guidance for offsetting in the Codification’s Derivatives and Hedging Topic.

 

PL-46


  (2)  Excludes investments accounted for under the equity and cost methods of accounting.
  (3) In accordance with the Codification’s Fair Value Measurement Topic 820-10, certain investments that do not have a readily determinable fair value are measured using the NAV per share (or its equivalent) practical expedient and have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value amounts presented in this table are intended to permit reconciliation of the fair value hierarchy to the amounts presented in the consolidated statements of financial condition.
  (4)  Separate account assets are measured at estimated fair value. Investment performance related to separate account assets is offset by corresponding amounts credited to contract holders whose liability is reflected in the separate account liabilities. Separate account liabilities are measured to equal the estimated fair value of separate account assets as prescribed by guidance in the Codification’s Financial Services – Insurance Topic for accounting and reporting of certain non traditional long-duration contracts and separate accounts. Excluded are the separate account assets measured at NAV discussed below.

As a practical expedient to value certain investments that do not have a readily determinable fair value, the Company uses the NAV to determine the fair value. The following table lists information regarding these investments as of December 31, 2015.

 

     Estimated      Redemption        Redemption    Outstanding  
Asset Class    Fair Value      Frequency   Initial Lock-Up    Notice Period    Commitment  
($ In Millions)  

Hedge funds

     $51       Monthly - 19%   None to 1 year    30 – 92 days   
      Quarterly - 66%        
      Semi-Annually - 4%        
      Annually - 11%        

Private equity funds

     23       None   N/A    N/A      $54   

Separate account hedge funds

     228       Monthly - 31%   None to 7 years    5 – 125 days   
      Quarterly - 50%        
      Annually - 19%        
  

 

 

            

 

 

 

Total assets measured at NAV

     $302                 $54   
  

 

 

            

 

 

 

ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT

The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic defines estimated fair value as the price that would be received to sell the asset or paid to transfer the liability at the measurement date. This “exit price” notion is a market-based measurement that requires a focus on the value that market participants would assign for an asset or liability.

The following section describes the valuation methodologies used by the Company to measure various types of financial instruments at estimated fair value and the controls that surround the valuation process. The Company reviews its valuation methodologies and controls on an ongoing basis and assesses whether these methodologies are appropriate based on the current economic environment.

FIXED MATURITY, EQUITY, FVO AND TRADING SECURITIES

The estimated fair values of fixed maturity securities available for sale, equity securities available for sale, FVO and trading securities are determined by management after considering external pricing sources and internal valuation techniques. For securities with sufficient trading volume, prices are obtained from third-party pricing services. For securities that are traded infrequently, estimated fair values are determined after evaluating prices obtained from third-party pricing services and independent brokers or are valued internally using various valuation techniques.

The Company’s management analyzes and evaluates prices received from independent third parties and determines whether they are reasonable estimates of fair value. Management’s analysis may include, but is not limited to, review of third-party pricing methodologies and inputs, analysis of recent trades, comparison to prices received from other third parties, and development of internal models utilizing observable market data of comparable securities. The Company assesses the reasonableness of valuations received from independent brokers by considering current market dynamics and current pricing for similar securities.

 

PL-47


For prices received from independent pricing services, the Company applies a formal process to challenge any prices received that are not considered representative of estimated fair value. If prices received from independent pricing services are not considered reflective of market activity or representative of estimated fair value, independent non-binding broker quotations are obtained, or an internally-developed valuation is prepared. Upon evaluation, the Company determines which source represents the best estimate of fair value. Overrides of third-party prices to internally-developed valuations of estimated fair value did not produce material differences in the estimated fair values for the majority of the portfolio. In the absence of such market observable activity, management’s best estimate is used.

Internal valuation techniques include matrix model pricing and internally-developed models, which incorporate observable market data, where available. Securities priced by the matrix model are primarily comprised of private placement securities. Matrix model pricing measures estimated fair value using cash flows, which are discounted using observable market yield curves provided by a major independent data service. The matrix model determines the discount yield based upon significant factors that include the security’s weighted average life, rating and sector.

Where matrix model pricing is not used, estimated fair values are determined by other internally-derived valuation tools which use market-observable data if available. Generally, this includes using an actively-traded comparable security as a benchmark for pricing. These internal valuation methods primarily represent discounted cash flow models that incorporate significant assumptive inputs such as spreads, discount rates, default rates, severity, and prepayment speeds. These inputs are analyzed by the Company’s portfolio managers and analysts, investment accountants and risk managers. Internally-developed estimates may also use unobservable data, which reflect the Company’s own assumptions about the inputs market participants would use.

Most securities priced by a major independent third-party pricing service and private placement securities that use the matrix model have been classified as Level 2, as management has verified that the significant inputs used in determining their estimated fair values are market observable and appropriate. Externally priced securities for which estimated fair value measurement inputs are not sufficiently transparent, such as securities valued based on independent broker quotations, have been classified as Level 3. Internally valued securities, including adjusted prices received from independent third parties, where significant management assumptions have been utilized in determining estimated fair value, have been classified as Level 3. Securities categorized as Level 1 consist primarily of investments in mutual funds.

The Company applies controls over the valuation process. Prices are reviewed and approved by the Company’s credit analysts that have industry expertise and considerable knowledge of the issuers. Management performs validation checks to determine the completeness and reasonableness of the pricing information, which include, but are not limited to, changes from identified pricing sources, significant or unusual price fluctuations above predetermined tolerance levels from the prior period, and back-testing of estimated fair values against prices of actual trades. A group comprised of the Company’s investment accountants, portfolio managers and analysts and risk managers meet to discuss any unusual items above the tolerance levels that may have been identified in the pricing review process. These unusual items are investigated, further analysis is performed and resolutions are appropriately documented.

OTHER INVESTMENTS

Other investments include non-marketable equity securities that do not have readily determinable estimated fair value. Certain significant inputs used in determining the estimated fair value of these equities are based on management assumptions or contractual terms with another party that cannot be readily observable in the market. These non-marketable equity securities are classified as Level 3 assets. Also included in other investments are the securities of the 40 Act Funds, which are valued using the same methodology as described above for fixed maturity, equity, FVO and trading securities.

DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS

Derivative instruments are reported at estimated fair value using pricing valuation models, which utilize market data inputs or independent broker quotations or exchange prices for exchange-traded futures. The Company calculates the estimated fair value of derivatives using market standard valuation methodologies for foreign currency and interest rate swaps and equity options. Internal models are used to value the equity total return swaps. The derivatives are valued using mid-market inputs that are predominantly observable in the market. Inputs include, but are not limited to, interest swap rates, foreign currency forward and spot rates, credit spreads and correlations, interest volatility, equity volatility and equity index levels. On a monthly basis, the Company performs an analysis of derivative valuations, which includes both quantitative and qualitative analyses. Examples of procedures performed include, but are not limited to, review of pricing statistics and trends, analysis of the impacts of changes in the market environment, and review of changes in the market value for each derivative by both risk managers and investment accountants. Internally calculated estimated fair values are reviewed and compared to external broker fair values for reasonableness.

 

PL-48


Excluding embedded derivatives, as of December 31, 2015, all of the OTC derivatives based upon notional values were priced by valuation models. A credit valuation analysis was performed for all derivative positions to measure the risk that the counterparties to the transaction will be unable to perform under the contractual terms (nonperformance risk) and was determined to be immaterial as of December 31, 2015.

Derivative instruments classified as Level 2 primarily include foreign currency and interest rate swaps. The derivative valuations are determined using pricing models with inputs that are observable in the market or can be derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data, primarily interest swap rates, interest rate volatility and foreign currency forward and spot rates.

Derivative instruments classified as Level 3 include complex derivatives, such as equity options and total return swaps. Also classified in Level 3 are embedded derivatives in certain insurance and reinsurance contracts. These derivatives are valued using pricing models, which utilize both observable and unobservable inputs, primarily interest rate volatility, equity volatility, equity index levels, nonperformance risk, and, to a lesser extent, market fees and broker quotations. A derivative instrument containing Level 2 inputs will be classified as a Level 3 financial instrument in its entirety if it has at least one significant Level 3 input.

VARIABLE ANNUITY GLB EMBEDDED DERIVATIVES

Estimated fair values for variable annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are calculated based upon significant unobservable inputs using internally developed models because active, observable markets do not exist for those items. As a result, variable annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are categorized as Level 3. Below is a description of the Company’s estimated fair value methodologies for these embedded derivatives.

Estimated fair value is calculated as an aggregation of estimated fair value and additional risk margins including behavior risk margin, mortality risk margin and credit standing adjustment. The resulting aggregation is reconciled or calibrated, if necessary, to market information that is, or may be, available to the Company, but may not be observable by other market participants. Each of the components described below are unobservable in the market place and requires subjectivity by the Company in determining their value.

 

    Behavior risk margin: This component adds a margin that market participants would require for the risk that the Company’s assumptions about policyholder behavior used in the estimated fair value model could differ from actual experience. This component includes assumptions about withdrawal utilization and lapse rates.

 

    Mortality risk margin: This component adds a margin in mortality assumptions, both for decrements for policyholders with GLBs, and for expected payout lifetimes in guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits.

 

    Credit standing adjustment: This component makes an adjustment that market participants would make to reflect the chance that GLB obligations or the GLB reinsurance recoverables will not be fulfilled (nonperformance risk).

SEPARATE ACCOUNT ASSETS

Separate account assets are reported at estimated fair value as a summarized total on the consolidated statements of financial condition. The estimated fair value of separate account assets is based on the estimated fair value of the underlying assets. Separate account assets are primarily invested in mutual funds, but also have investments in fixed maturity securities and hedge funds.

Level 1 assets include mutual funds that are valued based on reported net asset values provided by fund managers daily and can be redeemed without restriction. Management performs validation checks to determine the reasonableness of the pricing information, which include, but are not limited to, price fluctuations above predetermined thresholds from the prior day and validation against similar funds or indices. Variances are investigated, further analysis is performed and resolutions are appropriately documented.

Level 2 and 3 assets include fixed maturity securities. The pricing methodology and valuation controls are the same as those previously described in fixed maturity securities available for sale.

 

PL-49


LEVEL 3 RECONCILIATION

The tables below present reconciliations of the beginning and ending balances of the Level 3 financial assets and liabilities, net, that have been measured at estimated fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs.

 

          Total Gains or Losses     Transfers     Transfers                          
    January 1,     Included in     Included in     In to     Out of                       December 31,  
    2015     Earnings     OCI     Level 3 (1)     Level 3 (1)     Purchases     Sales     Settlements     2015  
    (In Millions)  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

    $29                       $29    

Foreign governments

    56           ($2)          ($44)            ($2)          

Corporate securities

    1,816         $14         (109)        $163         (292)        $252         ($3)        (221)        1,620    

RMBS

    14           (2)          (106)        265          (20)        151    

CMBS

                   51          (1)        54    

Collateralized debt obligations

    70                (6)                  65    

Other asset-backed securities

    288           (4)        6        (65)        135          (41)        319    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    2,277         15         (123)        169        (507)        703        (3)        (285)        2,246    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other equity securities

                  (4)              (5)            
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity securities

                  (4)                             (5)                 
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Trading securities

                 (6)        8        (6)        (1)          

Other investments

                           

Derivatives, net: (2)

                 

Equity derivatives

    188         60                   (157)        91    

Embedded derivatives

    (1,465)        106               (207)          187         (1,379)   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total derivatives

    (1,277)        166                              (207)               30         (1,288)   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Separate account assets (3)

                 (6)               (1)            
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

        $1,019         $186         ($127)        $169         ($519)        $506         ($15)        ($256)        $963    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

PL-50


         

Total Gains or Losses

    Transfers     Transfers                          
    January 1,

 

2014

   

 

Included in

 

Earnings

   

 

Included in

 

OCI

   

 

In to

 

Level 3 (1)

   

 

Out of

 

Level 3 (1)

    Purchases     Sales     Settlements     December 31,

 

2014

 
    (In Millions)  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

    $47            $4            ($21)             ($1)         $29     

Foreign governments

    77            4          $1          (37)         $15            (4)         56     

Corporate securities

    1,649          $31          46          241          (288)         362          ($61)         (164)         1,816     

RMBS

    93          (1)         4          15          (65)         19          (46)         (5)         14     

CMBS

    10                (5)             (1)         4     

Collateralized debt obligations

    83          4                    (17)         70     

Other asset-backed securities

    314          3          5          3          (48)         101            (90)         288     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    2,273          37          63          260          (464)         497          (107)         (282)         2,277     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other equity securities

    5            (1)                   4     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity securities

    5          -          (1)         -          -          -          -          -          4     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Trading securities

    3              2          (5)         23          (18)           5     

Other investments

    12                  1            (8)         5     

Derivatives, net: (2)

                 

Equity derivatives

    11          209                    (32)         188     

Embedded derivatives

    (647)         (872)               (130)           184          (1,465)    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total derivatives

    (636)         (663)         -          -          -          (130)         -          152          (1,277)    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Separate account assets (3)

    5              1              (1)           5     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $1,662          ($626)         $62          $263          ($469)         $391          ($126)         ($138)         $1,019     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

  (1) Transfers in and/or out are recognized at the end of each quarter.
  (2)  Excludes derivative net settlements of ($140) million and ($214) million in 2015 and 2014, respectively, that are recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Excludes synthetic GIC policy fees of $44 million in 2015 and 2014 that are recorded in net realized investment gain (loss). Excludes embedded derivative policy fees of $209 million and $199 million in 2015 and 2014, respectively, that are recorded in net realized investment gain (loss).
  (3) Included in earnings of separate account assets are realized/unrealized gain (loss) that are offset by corresponding amounts in separate account liabilities, which results in a net zero impact on earnings for the Company.

During the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, transfers into Level 3 were primarily attributable to the decreased availability and use of market observable inputs to estimate fair value. The transfers out of Level 3 were generally due to the use of market observable inputs in valuation methodologies, including the utilization of pricing service information. During the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company did not have any significant transfers between Levels 1 and 2.

 

PL-51


Amounts included in earnings of Level 3 financial assets and liabilities are as follows:

 

    Net

 

Investment

 

Income

    Net

 

Realized

 

Investment

 

Gain (Loss)

            OTTI             Total      

Year Ended December 31, 2015:

    (In Millions)   

Corporate securities

    $20          $5          ($11)         $14     

Collateralized debt obligations

    1              1     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    21          5          (11)         15     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other equity securities

      5            5     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity securities

    -          5          -          5     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Equity derivatives

      60            60     

Embedded derivatives

      106            106     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total derivatives

    -          166          -          166     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $21          $176          ($11)         $186     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    Net

 

Investment

 

Income

    Net

 

Realized

 

Investment

 

Gain (Loss)

    OTTI     Total  

Year Ended December 31, 2014:

    (In Millions)   

Corporate securities

    $24          $9          ($2)         $31     

RMBS

      (1)           (1)    

Collateralized debt obligations

    4              4     

Other asset-backed securities

    3              3     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

    31          8          (2)         37     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Equity derivatives

      209            209     

Embedded derivatives

      (872)           (872)    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total derivatives

    -          (663)         -          (663)    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    $31          ($655)         ($2)         ($626)    
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The table below represents the net amount of total gains or losses for the period, attributable to the change in unrealized gain (loss) relating to assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 that were still held at the end of the reporting period.

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Derivatives, net: (1)

     

Equity derivatives

     $37           $154     

Embedded derivatives

     103           (830)    
  

 

 

 

Total derivatives

     $140           ($676)    
  

 

 

 

 

  (1) Amounts are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

 

PL-52


The following table presents certain quantitative information of significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement for Level 3 assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2015 ($ In Millions).

 

    

Estimated Fair Value

 

Asset (Liability)

    

Predominant

 

Valuation Method

  

Significant

 

Unobservable Inputs

  

Range

 

(Weighted Average)

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

     $29         Discounted cash flow    Spread (1)    290-294 (293)

Foreign governments

     8         Discounted cash flow    Spread (1)    122

Corporate securities

     1,620         Discounted cash flow    Spread (1)    64-6410 (454)
      Collateral value (3)    Collateral value    45-123 (89)
      Market pricing    Quoted prices (2)    22-116 (99)

RMBS

     151         Market pricing    Quoted prices (2)    100-101 (100)

CMBS

     54         Discounted cash flow    Spread (1)    151-537 (297)
         Prepayment rate    0%
         Default rate    0%
         Severity    0%

Collateralized debt obligations

     65         Market pricing    Quoted prices (2)    72-88 (84)

Other asset-backed securities

     319         Discounted cash flow    Spread (1)    67-471 (148)
      Market pricing    Quoted prices (2)    74-121 (100)
      Cap at call price    Call price    100

Other investments

     5         Redemption value (4)    Redemption value    100

Equity derivatives

     91         Option pricing model    Equity volatility    13% - 47% (17%)

Embedded derivatives (5)

     (1,379)        Option pricing techniques    Equity volatility    12% - 47%
         Mortality:   
         Ages 0-40    0.01% - 0.18%
         Ages 41-60    0.06% - 0.55%
         Ages 61-120    0.39% - 100%
         Mortality improvement    0% - 1.50%
         Withdrawal utilization    0% - 80%
         Lapse rates    0% - 100%
         Credit standing adjustment    0.55% - 1.94%
  

 

 

          

Total

     $963              
  

 

 

          

 

  (1)  Range and weighted average are presented in basis points over the benchmark interest rate curve and include adjustments attributable to illiquidity premiums, expected duration, structure and credit quality.
  (2) Independent third-party quotations were used in the determination of estimated fair value.
  (3) Valuation based on the Company’s share of estimated fair values of the underlying assets held in the trusts.
  (4) Represents FHLB common stock that is valued at the contractual amount that will be received upon redemption.
  (5)  This liability consists of embedded derivatives from variable annuity GLBs, fixed indexed annuity products and life indexed account insurance products. Since the valuation methodology for the embedded derivatives uses a range of inputs that vary at the contract level over the cash flow projection period, presenting a range, rather than weighted average, is more representative of the unobservable input used in the valuation.

 

PL-53


NONRECURRING FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

Certain assets are measured at estimated fair value on a nonrecurring basis and are not included in the tables presented above. The amounts below relate to certain assets measured at estimated fair value during the year.

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2015      Year Ended December 31, 2014  
    

Carrying Value

 

    

Estimated Fair

 

           

Carrying Value

 

    

Estimated Fair

 

        
    

Prior to

 

    

Value After

 

           

Prior to

 

    

Value After

 

        
     Measurement      Measurement      Impairment      Measurement      Measurement      Impairment  
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Mortgage loans

     $36         $24         ($12)         $62         $44         ($18)   

Other investments

     19         15         (4)         10         9         (1)   

Aircraft

     191         152         (39)         203         166         (37)   

MORTGAGE LOANS

The estimated fair value after measurement was based on the valuation of the underlying real estate collateral net of estimated costs to sell. These loans were classified as Level 3 assets. The impairment loss is gross of ceded reinsurance of $1 million and $4 million for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

OTHER INVESTMENTS

The estimated fair value after measurement for real estate investments is determined using a combination of the present value of the expected future cash flows and comparable sales. The estimated fair value after measurement for investments in limited partnerships is based on the equity provided by the underlying investment managers. The investments are classified as Level 3 assets.

AIRCRAFT

The estimated fair value after measurement is based on the present value of the future cash flows, which can include contractual lease payments, projected future lease payments, estimated residual value and estimated sales price. Projected future lease payments are based upon current contracted lease rates for similar aircraft and industry trends. These assets are classified as Level 3.

The Company did not have any other nonfinancial assets or liabilities measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis resulting from impairments as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. The Company has not made any changes in the valuation methodologies for nonfinancial assets and liabilities.

 

PL-54


The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments that are not carried at fair value under the Codification’s Financial Instruments Topic are as follows:

 

     December 31, 2015      December 31, 2014  
    

Carrying

 

Amount

    

Estimated

 

Fair Value

    

Carrying

 

Amount

    

Estimated

 

Fair Value

 
     (In Millions)  

Assets:

           

Mortgage loans

     $11,092         $11,623         $9,327         $10,031   

Policy loans

     7,331         7,331         7,234         7,234   

Other investments

     209         251         199         238   

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,845         1,845         3,220         3,220   

Restricted cash

     265         265         266         266   

Liabilities:

           

Funding agreements and GICs

     295         290         829         881   

Annuity and deposit liabilities

     14,894         14,894         13,310         13,310   

Short-term debt

     495         495         268         268   

Long-term debt

     9,095         9,519         8,063         8,643   

The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial instruments as of December 31, 2015 and 2014:

MORTGAGE LOANS

The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows, using current rates that are applicable to similar credit quality, property type and average maturity of the composite portfolio.

POLICY LOANS

Policy loans are not separable from their associated insurance contract and bear no credit risk since they do not exceed the contract’s cash surrender value, making these assets fully secured by the cash surrender value of the contracts. Therefore, the carrying amount of the policy loans is a reasonable approximation of their fair value.

OTHER INVESTMENTS

Included in other investments are private equity investments accounted for under the cost method of accounting. The fair value is based on the ownership percentage of the NAV of the underlying equity of the investments.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

The carrying amounts approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.

RESTRICTED CASH

The carrying amounts approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.

FUNDING AGREEMENTS AND GICs

The estimated fair value of funding agreements and GICs is estimated using the rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

 

PL-55


ANNUITY AND DEPOSIT LIABILITIES

Annuity and deposit liabilities primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated credited interest. The estimated fair value of annuity and deposit liabilities approximates carrying amount based on an analysis of discounted future cash flows with maturities similar to the product portfolio liabilities.

DEBT

The carrying amount of short-term debt is a reasonable estimate of its fair value because the interest rates are variable and based on current market rates. The estimated fair value of long-term debt is based on market quotes, except for VIE debt and non-recourse debt, for which an analysis is performed to ensure the carrying amounts are reasonable estimates of their fair values.

 

13. OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)

The Company displays comprehensive income (loss) and its components on the consolidated statements of comprehensive income (loss) and consolidated statements of equity. The balance of and changes in each component of AOCI attributable to the Company are as follows:

 

   

Unrealized

 

Gain (Loss) on

 

    Securities Available    

 

for Sale, Net             (1)

   

Gain (Loss) on

 

Derivatives

   

  Other,  

 

Net

   

Total

 

Accumulated Other

 

Comprehensive

 

Income (Loss)

 
 

 

 

 
    (In Millions)           

Balance, January 1, 2013

    $1,630        $31        ($13     $1,648     

Change in OCI before reclassifications

    (1,200 )  (2)      42        6        (1,152)    

Income tax (expense) benefit

    419        (15       404     

Amounts reclassified from AOCI

    (79     14          (65)    

Income tax expense (benefit)

    28        (5       23     
 

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2013

    798        67        (7     858     

Change in OCI before reclassifications

    790   (3)      18        (7     801     

Income tax (expense) benefit

    (276     (7     2        (281)    

Amounts reclassified from AOCI

    (31     6          (25)    

Income tax expense (benefit)

    11        (2       9     
 

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2014

    1,292        82        (12     1,362     

Change in OCI before reclassifications

    (1,097 )  (4)      7        (8     (1,098)    

Income tax (expense) benefit

    384        (4     3        383     

Amounts reclassified from AOCI

    63            63     

Income tax benefit

    (22         (22)    
 

 

 

 

Balance, December 31, 2015

    $620        $85        ($17     $688     
 

 

 

 

 

  (1) See Note 5 and Note 9 for information related to DAC and future policy benefits.
  (2)  Includes allocation of holding gain from DAC and URR of $237 million and $370 million, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2013.
  (3)  Includes allocation of holding loss from DAC and URR of ($94) million and ($523) million, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2014.
  (4)  Includes allocation of holding gain from DAC and URR of $267 million and $347 million, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

PL-56


RECLASSIFICATIONS FROM AOCI

The table below presents amounts reclassified from each component of AOCI and their locations on the consolidated statements of operations. Amounts are shown gross of tax.

 

     Years Ended December 31,      
Reclassification adjustments:    2015          2014          2013      
  

 

 

   
    

 

(In Millions)

 

  

 

 

Unrealized (gain) loss on securities available for sale, net:

              

Sale of securities available for sale

     ($18   (1)      ($40   (1)      ($97   (1)

OTTI recognized on securities available for sale

     81      (2)      9      (2)      18      (2)
  

 

 

   

Total unrealized (gain) loss on securities available for sale, net

     63           (31        (79  

(Gain) loss on derivatives:

              

Foreign currency and interest rate swaps

          3      (1)     
     (2   (3)      (3   (3)      (2   (3)
     2      (4)      6      (4)      16      (4)
  

 

 

   

Total loss on derivatives

     -           6           14     
  

 

 

   

Total amounts reclassified from AOCI

             $63                     ($25                ($65  
  

 

 

   

Location on the consolidated statements of operations:

(1) Net realized investment gain (loss) (2) OTTI (3) Net investment income (4) Interest credited to policyholder account balances

 

14. REINSURANCE

The accounting for reinsurance requires extensive use of assumptions and estimates, particularly related to the future performance of the underlying business and the potential impact of counterparty credit risk. The Company periodically reviews, and modifies as appropriate, the estimates and assumptions used to establish assets and liabilities relating to ceded and assumed reinsurance. Reinsurance receivables, included in other assets, were $1,159 million and $848 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Reinsurance payables, included in other liabilities, were $257 million and $208 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

The components of insurance premiums presented in the consolidated statements of operations are as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015     2014     2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Direct premiums

     $1,018        $1,035        $1,098     

Reinsurance assumed (1)

     1,307        787        540     

Reinsurance ceded

     (392     (377     (356)    
  

 

 

 

Insurance premiums

         $1,933            $1,445            $1,282     
  

 

 

 

 

  (1)  Included are $319 million, $77 million and $25 million of assumed premiums from Pacific Life Re Limited (PLR), an affiliate of the Company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. PLR is incorporated in the UK and provides reinsurance to insurance and annuity providers in the UK, Ireland, Australia and to insurers in selected markets in Asia.

 

PL-57


15. INCOME TAXES

The provision for income taxes is as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Current

     $36         $47         $13     

Deferred

     113         55         118     
  

 

 

 

Provision for income taxes

             $149                 $102                 $131     
  

 

 

 

A reconciliation of the provision for income taxes based on the Federal corporate statutory tax rate of 35% to the provision for income taxes reflected in the consolidated financial statements is as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2015      2014      2013  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)   

Provision for income taxes at the statutory rate

     $263         $218         $281     

Separate account dividends received deduction

     (84)         (82)         (89)    

Singapore Transfer

     (14)         (22)         (34)    

LIHTC and foreign tax credits

     (20)         (15)         (16)    

Other

     4         3         (11)    
  

 

 

 

Provision for income taxes

             $149                 $102                 $131     
  

 

 

 

ACG transfers aircraft assets and related liabilities to foreign subsidiaries in Singapore (collectively referred to as the Singapore Transfer). The Singapore Transfer decreases the provision for income taxes primarily due to the reversal of deferred tax liabilities related to basis differences in the aircraft assets transferred. U.S. income taxes have not been recognized on the excess of the amount for financial reporting over the tax basis of investments in foreign subsidiaries that are essentially permanent in duration. This amount becomes taxable upon a repatriation of assets from the subsidiary or a sale or liquidation of the subsidiary.

It is the practice and intention of the Company to reinvest the earnings of its non-U.S. subsidiaries in those operations. In addition to those basis differences transferred during 2015, 2014 and 2013, as of December 31, 2015, the Company has not made a provision for U.S. or additional foreign withholding taxes of approximately $23 million of foreign subsidiary undistributed earnings that are essentially permanent in duration. Generally, such amounts become subject to U.S. taxation upon the remittance of dividends and under certain other circumstances. It is not practicable to estimate the amount of deferred tax liability related to investments in these foreign subsidiaries.

The Company identified a liability for uncertain tax positions of $58 million for a tax position for which there is uncertainty about the timing, but not the deductibility, of tax deductions relating to depreciation. The Company intends to file an application for an automatic change in the method of accounting with the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) in 2016 which will eliminate the contingency upon filing. None of the uncertain tax position affects the effective tax rate.

Because this tax contingency would serve to reduce existing net operating loss carryforwards, pursuant to ASU 2013-11, the Company recorded the contingency as an offset against the deferred tax asset for net operating loss carryforwards. Since the contingency only reduces net operating loss carryforwards, this contingency requires no accrual for interest or penalties. A reconciliation in the changes in the unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (In Millions):

 

Balance as of January 1, 2014

     $ -   

Additions and deletions

  
  

 

 

 

Balance as of December 31, 2014

     -   

Gross increase - prior year positions

     58   
  

 

 

 

Balance as of December 31, 2015

     $58   
  

 

 

 

 

PL-58


During the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, the Company paid an insignificant amount of interest and penalties to state tax authorities.

The net deferred tax liability, included in other liabilities, is comprised of the following tax effected temporary differences:

 

     December 31,  
     2015     2014  
  

 

 

 
     (In Millions)  

Deferred tax assets:

    

Policyholder reserves

     $797        $866     

Investment valuation

     548        589     

Tax credit carryforwards

     389        370     

Tax net operating loss carryforwards

     242        344     

Deferred compensation

     76        72     

Other

     134        102     
  

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets

     2,186        2,343     
  

 

 

 

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

DAC

     (1,176     (1,295)    

Depreciation

     (917     (847)    

Hedging

     (450     (429)    

Partnership income

     (113     (115)    

Other

     (33     (47)    
  

 

 

 

Total deferred tax liabilities

     (2,689     (2,733)    
  

 

 

 

Net deferred tax liability

     (503     (390)    

Unrealized gain on derivatives and securities available for sale

     (358     (716)    

Other adjustments

     (5     (8)    
  

 

 

 

Net deferred tax liability

             ($866             ($1,114)    
  

 

 

 

The tax net operating loss carryforwards relate to Federal tax losses incurred in 2006 through 2014 with a 20-year carryforward for non-life losses and a 15-year carryforward for life losses, and California tax losses incurred in 2005 through 2014 with a ten-year carryforward.

The tax credit carryforwards relate to LIHTC, foreign tax credits, and alternative minimum tax (AMT) credits generated from 2000 to 2014. The LIHTC and foreign tax credits begin to expire in 2020. Foreign tax credits, LIHTC and tax net operating loss carryforwards of $170 million expire between 2020 and 2025. AMT credits of $134 million possess no expiration date. The remainder will expire between 2026 and 2034.

The Codification’s Income Taxes Topic requires separate footnote disclosure of the impact of foreign taxes. While the Company does have foreign operations, the results of those operations have not been separately disclosed since they are not material.

The Codification’s Income Taxes Topic requires the reduction of deferred tax assets by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that a portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. Based on management’s assessment, it is more likely than not that the Company’s deferred tax assets will be realized through future taxable income, including the reversal of deferred tax liabilities.

PMHC files income tax returns in U.S. Federal and various state jurisdictions. PMHC is under continuous audit by the IRS and is audited periodically by some state taxing authorities. The IRS has completed audits of PMHC’s tax returns through the tax year ended December 31, 2008, and is auditing PMHC’s tax returns for the tax years ended December 31, 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012. The State of California is auditing tax year ended December 31, 2009. The Company does not expect the current Federal and California audits to result in any material assessments.

 

PL-59


16. SEGMENT INFORMATION

The Company has four operating segments: Life Insurance, Retirement Solutions, Aircraft Leasing and Reinsurance. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences in products and services offered. All other activity is included in the Corporate and Other segment.

The Life Insurance segment provides a broad range of life insurance products through multiple distribution channels operating in primarily the upper income and corporate markets. Principal products include UL, indexed universal life, VUL, survivor life, interest sensitive whole life, corporate-owned life insurance and traditional products such as whole life and term life. Distribution channels include regional life offices, marketing organizations, broker-dealer firms, wirehouses and M Financial, an association of independently owned and operated insurance and financial producers.

The Retirement Solutions segment’s principal products include variable and fixed annuity products, mutual funds, and structured settlement and group retirement annuities, which are offered through multiple distribution channels. Distribution channels include independent planners, financial institutions, national/regional wirehouses and a network of structured settlement brokers.

The Aircraft Leasing segment offers aircraft leasing to the airline industry throughout the world and provides brokerage and asset management services to other third-parties.

The Reinsurance segment primarily includes the domestic and international retrocession business, which assumes mortality risks from other life reinsurers. The international retrocession business serves clients primarily in Canada, Europe and Asia.

The Corporate and Other segment consists of assets and activities, which support the Company’s operating segments. Included in these support activities is the management of investments, certain entity level hedging activities and other expenses and other assets not directly attributable to the operating segments. The Corporate and Other segment also includes several operations that do not qualify as operating segments and the elimination of intersegment transactions.

The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income (loss) and assets as it uses to measure its consolidated net income (loss) and assets. Net investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment. Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment income. The provision (benefit) for income taxes is allocated based on each segment’s actual tax provision (benefit).

Certain segments are allocated equity based on formulas determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate of return on interdivision debentures supporting the allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as net investment income in the operating segments.

The Company generates the majority of its revenues and net income from customers located in the U.S. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company had foreign investments with an estimated fair value of $10.4 billion and $10.2 billion, respectively. Aircraft leased to foreign customers were $7.1 billion and $6.6 billion as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Revenues derived from any customer did not exceed 10% of consolidated total revenues for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013.

 

PL-60


The following segment information is as of and for the year ended December 31, 2015:

 

   

    Life

 

    Insurance

   

Retirement

 

Solutions

   

Aircraft

 

Leasing

    Reinsurance    

Corporate

 

and Other

    Total  

 

 
REVENUES   (In Millions)  

Policy fees and insurance premiums

    $1,206         $1,734           $1,239           $4,179    

Net investment income

    1,133         1,201         $1         25         $197         2,557    

Net realized investment gain (loss)

    17         186                  30         234    

OTTI

    (58)        (27)            (11)        (96)   

Investment advisory fees

    27         296             30         353    

Aircraft leasing revenue

        833             833    

Other income

    21         207         23         17         (8)        260    
 

 

 

 

Total revenues

    2,346         3,597         858         1,281         238         8,320    
 

 

 

 

BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

           

Policy benefits

    667         1,404           1,178           3,249    

Interest credited

    852         383             15         1,250    

Commission expenses

    345         831           24           1,200    

Operating expenses

    356         463         141         28         126         1,114    

Depreciation of aircraft

        342             342    

Interest expense

             231           176         414    
 

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

          2,227         3,081         714         1,230         317         7,569    
 

 

 

 

Income (loss) before provision (benefit) for income taxes

    119         516         144         51         (79)        751    

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    30         89         37         18         (25)        149    
 

 

 

 

Net income (loss)

    89         427         107         33         (54)        602    

Less: net loss attributable to noncontrolling interests

                     
 

 

 

 

Net income (loss) attributable to the Company

    $89         $427         $107         $33         ($52)        $604    
 

 

 

 

Total assets

    $38,504         $80,383         $9,345         $1,550         $5,353         $135,135    

DAC

    1,462         3,201           56           4,719    

Separate account assets

    6,978         49,996               56,974    

Policyholder and contract liabilities

    28,718         25,434           1,000         295         55,447    

Separate account liabilities

    6,978         49,996               56,974    

 

PL-61


The following segment information is as of and for the year ended December 31, 2014:

 

   

  Life

 

  Insurance

   

Retirement

 

Solutions

   

Aircraft

 

Leasing

    Reinsurance    

Corporate

 

and Other

    Total  

 

 
REVENUES   (In Millions)  

Policy fees and insurance premiums

    $933         $1,761           $720           $3,414    

Net investment income

    1,084         1,075         $1         14         $234         2,408    

Net realized investment gain (loss)

    12         (629)          (1)        21         (597)   

OTTI

    (4)        (8)            (12)        (24)   

Investment advisory fees

    27         308             41         376    

Aircraft leasing revenue

        796             796    

Other income

    20         204         24                       259    
 

 

 

 

Total revenues

    2,072         2,711         821         742         286         6,632    
 

 

 

 

BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

           

Policy benefits

    600         1,436           614           2,650    

Interest credited

    803         346             54         1,203    

Commission expenses

    212         166           20           398    

Operating expenses

    327         438         137         34         104         1,040    

Depreciation of aircraft

        336             336    

Interest expense

             244           133         383    
 

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

    1,948         2,386         717         668         291         6,010    
 

 

 

 

Income (loss) before provision (benefit) for income taxes

    124         325         104         74         (5)        622    

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    33         41         12         26         (10)        102    
 

 

 

 

Net income

    91         284         92         48                520    

Less: net (income) loss attributable to noncontrolling interests

        (2)                   
 

 

 

 

Net income attributable to the Company

    $91         $284         $90         $48         $10         $523    
 

 

 

 

Total assets

        $37,964         $82,206         $8,741         $923         $4,643         $134,477    

DAC

    1,311         3,370           61           4,742    

Separate account assets

    7,136         53,489               60,625    

Policyholder and contract liabilities

    27,179         23,764           597         829         52,369    

Separate account liabilities

    7,136         53,489               60,625    

 

PL-62


The following segment information is for the year ended December 31, 2013:

 

     Life
Insurance
     Retirement
Solutions
     Aircraft
Leasing
     Reinsurance     

Corporate

and

Other

     Total  

 

 
REVENUES    (In Millions)  

Policy fees and insurance premiums

     $1,073         $1,816            $476            $3,365    

Net investment income

     1,047         1,000         $5         14         $224         2,290    

Net realized investment gain (loss)

     27         886         1            (328)         586    

OTTI

     (10)         (6)               (11)         (27)    

Investment advisory fees

     26         288               37         351    

Aircraft leasing revenue

           736               736    

Other income

     14         190         24         9         16         253    
  

 

 

 

Total revenues

     2,177         4,174         766         499         (62)         7,554    
  

 

 

 

BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

                 

Policy benefits

     533         1,479            354            2,366    

Interest credited

     785         332               131         1,248    

Commission expenses

     278         1,056            20            1,354    

Operating expenses

     328         423         146         32         122         1,051    

Depreciation of aircraft

           326               326    

Interest expense

           232            175         407    
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

           1,924         3,290         704         406         428         6,752    
  

 

 

 

Income (loss) before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     253         884         62         93         (490)         802    

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     76         220         (12)         33         (186)         131    
  

 

 

 

Net income (loss)

     177         664         74         60         (304)         671    

Less: net (income) loss attributable to noncontrolling interests

           2            (21)         (19)    
  

 

 

 

Net income (loss) attributable to the Company

     $177         $664         $76         $60         ($325)         $652    
  

 

 

 

 

17. TRANSACTIONS WITH RELATED PARTIES

PLFA serves as the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund and the Pacific Funds Series Trust. Investment advisory and other fees are based primarily upon the NAV of the underlying portfolios. These fees, included in investment advisory fees and other income, amounted to $378 million, $395 million and $367 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. In addition, Pacific Life and PLFA provide certain support services to the Pacific Select Fund, the Pacific Funds Series Trust and other affiliates based on an allocation of actual costs. These fees amounted to $14 million, $15 million and $15 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

Additionally, the Pacific Select Fund and Pacific Funds Series Trust have service and other plans whereby the funds pay Pacific Select Distributors, LLC (PSD), a wholly owned broker-dealer subsidiary of Pacific Life, as distributor of the funds, a service fee in connection with services rendered to or procured for shareholders of the fund or their variable annuity and life insurance contract owners. These services may include, but are not limited to, payment of compensation to broker-dealers, including PSD itself, and other financial institutions and organizations, which assist in providing any of the services. For the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, PSD received $130 million, $136 million and $131 million, respectively, in service and other fees from the Pacific Select Fund and Pacific Funds Series Trust, which are recorded in other income.

 

PL-63


Pacific Life and PL&A’s structured settlement transactions are typically designed such that an affiliated assignment company assumes settlement obligations from external parties in exchange for consideration. The affiliated assignment company then funds the assumed settlement obligations by purchasing annuity contracts from Pacific Life and PL&A. Consequently, substantially all of the Pacific Life and PL&A’s structured settlement annuities are sold to an affiliated assignment company. Included in the liability for future policy benefits are contracts with the affiliated assignment company with contract values of $2.9 billion and $2.6 billion as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. In addition, included in the liability for policyholder account balances are contracts with the affiliated assignment company of $1.7 billion and $1.3 billion as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Related to these contracts, Pacific Life and PL&A received $298 million, $296 million and $381 million of insurance premiums and paid $164 million, $148 million and $125 million of policy benefits for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

ACG has derivative swap contracts with Pacific LifeCorp as the counterparty. The notional amounts total $579 million and $877 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The estimated fair values of the derivatives were net liabilities of $22 million and $59 million as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

18. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

COMMITMENTS

The Company has outstanding commitments that may be funded to make investments primarily in fixed maturity securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments, as follows (In Millions):

 

Years Ending December 31:    Mortgage Loans     

Limited

 

Partnerships

    

Fixed Maturity

 

Securities and

 

Other Investments

     Total  
  

 

 

 

2016

     $485         $207         $186         $878   

2017 through 2018

     559         211            770   

2019 through 2020

     71         87            158   

2021 and thereafter

        59         2         61   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     $1,115         $564         $188         $1,867   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Company leases office facilities under various operating leases, which in most, but not all cases, are noncancelable. Rent expense, which is included in operating and other expenses, in connection with these leases was $8 million, $8 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Aggregate minimum future office lease commitments are as follows (In Millions):

 

Years Ending December 31:

  

2016

     $9   

2017 through 2020

     24   

2021 and thereafter

     6   
  

 

 

 

Total

     $39   
  

 

 

 

As of December 31, 2015, ACG had commitments to purchase 122 aircraft scheduled for delivery through 2021. All of these commitments arise from fixed price purchase agreements with Boeing, Airbus and other third parties, and include adjustments for inflation. As of December 31, 2015, the aggregate estimated total remaining payments (including adjustments for certain contractual escalation provisions) total $5,974 million and are due as follows:

 

    up to $906 million in less than one year,

 

    an additional $1,908 million in one to three years,

 

    an additional $2,445 million in three to five years, and

 

    an additional $715 million thereafter.

As of December 31, 2015, deposits related to these agreements totaled $393 million and are included in other assets.

 

PL-64


The Company entered into an agreement with PLR to guarantee the performance of reinsurance obligations of PLR. During 2015, Pacific Life entered into an agreement with Pacific Life Re (Australia) Pty Limited (PLRA), a wholly owned indirect subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, to guarantee the performance of reinsurance obligations of PLRA. These guarantees are secondary to the guarantees provided by Pacific LifeCorp and would only be triggered in the event of nonperformance by both PLR or PLRA and Pacific LifeCorp. Management believes that additional obligations, if any, related to the guarantee agreements are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

Pacific Life has an agreement with PLRC to guarantee the performance of reinsurance obligations of PLRC. Management believes that additional obligations, if any, related to the guarantee agreement are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

During 2015, Pacific Life entered into a commitment to provide funds, on Pacific LifeCorp’s behalf, of up to approximately $150 million to PLR. This commitment is secondary to Pacific LifeCorp and is contingent on the nonperformance by Pacific LifeCorp. Management believes that additional obligations, if any, related to this commitment are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

CONTINGENCIES - LITIGATION

The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve allegations for extra-contractual damages. Although the Company is confident of its position in these matters, success is not a certainty and a judge or jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements. The Company believes adequate provision has been made in its consolidated financial statements for all probable and reasonably estimable losses for litigation claims against the Company.

CONTINGENCIES - IRS REVENUE RULING

During 2007, the IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-54, which provided the IRS’ interpretation of tax law regarding the computation of the Dividends Received Deductions (DRD) and Revenue Ruling 2007-61, which suspended Revenue Ruling 2007-54 and indicated the IRS would address the proper interpretation of tax law in a regulation project that is on the IRS’ priority guidance plan. The IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2014-7 that superseded Revenue Ruling 2007-54 and Revenue Ruling 2007-61. This ruling holds that the IRS will not address this issue through regulation, but defer to legislative action. Depending on legislative action, the Company could lose a substantial amount of DRD tax benefits, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

CONTINGENCIES - OTHER

In the course of its business, the Company provides certain indemnifications related to dispositions, acquisitions, investments, lease agreements or other transactions that are triggered by, among other things, breaches of representations, warranties or covenants provided by the Company. These obligations are typically subject to time limitations that vary in duration, including contractual limitations and those that arise by operation of law, such as applicable statutes of limitation. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not historically made material payments for these types of indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for certain matters. Management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters and the Company’s estimate of reasonably possible losses exceeding amounts already recognized on an aggregated basis is immaterial and are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

Most of the jurisdictions in which the Company is admitted to transact business require life insurance companies to participate in guaranty associations, which are organized to pay contractual benefits owed pursuant to insurance policies issued by insolvent life insurance companies. These associations levy assessments, up to prescribed limits, on all member companies in a particular state based on the proportionate share of premiums written by member companies in the lines of business in which the insolvent insurer operated. The Company has not received notification of any insolvency that is expected to result in a material guaranty fund assessment.

 

PL-65


The Asset Purchase Agreements of the ACG VIE securitization (Note 4) provide that Pacific LifeCorp will guarantee the performance of certain obligations of ACG, as well as provide certain indemnifications, and that Pacific Life will assume certain obligations of ACG arising from the breach of certain representations and warranties under the Asset Purchase Agreements. Management believes that obligations, if any, related to these guarantees are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements. The financial debt obligations of the ACG VIE securitization are non-recourse to the Company and are not guaranteed by the Company.

In connection with the operations of certain subsidiaries, the Company has made commitments to provide for additional capital funding as may be required.

See Note 2 for discussion of contingencies related to reinsurance of statutory reserves to affiliates.

See Note 8 for discussion of contingencies related to derivative instruments.

See Note 15 for discussion of other contingencies related to income taxes.

 

 

 

PL-66